MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Basic Service Manual (Rev. D) MTR3000_BSM_68007024096_D BSM 68007024096 D

User Manual: MTR3000_BSM_68007024096_D

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 306 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

68007024096_D.pdf

Foreword

This manual covers all versions of the MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater, unless otherwise specified. It

includes all the information necessary to maintain peak product performance and maximum working time, using levels 1

and 2 maintenance procedures. This level of service goes down to the module replacement level and is typical of some

local service centers, Motorola Authorized Dealers, self-maintained customers, and distributors.

General Safety Precautions

See "General Safety and Installation Standards and Guidelines," on page ii.

Computer Software Copyrights

The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in

semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain

exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce

in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in

the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or

distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola

products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the

copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by

operation of law in the sale of a product.

Document Copyrights

No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written

permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any

means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola.

Disclaimer

The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is

assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve

readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product

or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Controlled copies

of this document is available via Motorola On-Line (MOL).

Trademarks

MOTOROLA and the Stylized M logo are registered in the U.S. Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service

names are the property of their respective owners.

These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To

reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than

that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do

so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

General Safety and Installation

Standards and Guidelines

ATTENTION!

WARNING: For safe installation, operation, service and repair of this equipment, follow

the safety precautions and instructions described below, as well as any additional

safety information in Motorola’s product service and installation manuals and the

Motorola R56 Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites manual

(6881089E50). To obtain copies of these materials, please contact Motorola as

directed at the end of this section. After installation, these instructions should be

retained and readily available for any person operating or servicing this base station/

repeater or working near it.

Failure to follow these safety precautions and instructions could result in serious injury

or property damage.

The installation process requires preparation and knowledge of the site before

installation begins. Review installation procedures and precautions in the Motorola

R56 manual before performing any site or component installation. Personnel must use

safe work practices and good judgment, and always follow applicable safety

procedures, such as requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA), the National Electrical Code (NEC), and local codes.

W A R N I N G

The following are additional general safety precautions that must be observed:

• To continue compliance with any applicable regulations and maintain the safety of

this equipment, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized

modifications.

• All equipment must be serviced by Motorola trained personnel.

• If troubleshooting the equipment while the power is on, be aware of live circuits

which could contain hazardous voltage.

• Do not operate the radio transmitters unless all RF connectors are secure and all

connectors are properly terminated.

• All equipment must be properly grounded in accordance with the Motorola R56

and specified installation instructions for safe operation.

• Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. Do not block or

cover openings that protect the devices from overheating.

• Some equipment components can become extremely hot during operation. Turn

off all power to the equipment and wait until sufficiently cool before touching.

• Maintain emergency first aid kits at the site.

• Never store combustible materials in or near equipment racks. The combination of

combustible material, heat and electrical energy increases the risk of a fire hazard.

• Equipment shall be installed in a site that meets the requirements of a

“restricted access location,” per (UL60950-1 & EN60950-1), which is defined as

follows: “Access can only be gained by service persons or by users who have

been instructed about the reasons for the restrictions applied to the location and

about any precautions that shall be taken; and access is through the use of a

tool or lock and key, or other means of security, and is controlled by the authority

responsible for the location.”

• Burn hazard. The metal housing of the product may become extremely hot. Use

caution when working around the equipment.

• RF energy burn hazard. Disconnect power in the cabinet to prevent injury before

disconnecting and connecting antennas.

• Shock hazard. The outer shields of all Tx and Rx RF cables outer shields must

be grounded per Motorola R56 manual.

• Shock hazard. DC input voltage shall be no higher than 60 VDC. This maximum

voltage shall include consideration of the battery charging “float voltage”

associated with the intended supply system, regardless of the marked power

rating of the equipment.

• All Tx and Rx RF cables shall be connected to a surge protection device

according to Motorola R56 manual. Do not connect Tx and Rx RF cables directly

to an outside antenna.

• Compliance with National and International standards and guidelines for

human exposure to Electromagnetic Energy (EME) at Transmitter Antenna sites

generally requires that persons having access to a site shall be aware of the

potential for exposure to EME and can exercise control of exposure by

appropriate means, such as adhering to warning sign instructions. See this

installation manual and Appendix A of Motorola R56.

This product complies with the requirements set forth by the European R&TTE regulations

and applicable CENELEC standards concerning human exposure to Electromagnetic

Energy (EME) at Transmitter Antenna sites. "Appendix G" in this manual includes an EME

exposure analysis of a typical system configuration for this product.

For a different system configuration than the typical configuration, compliance with

applicable EME exposure standards (current versions of the EN50384 and EN50385

standards for occupational and general public exposure, respectively) can be evaluated by

either employing the method illustrated in the typical system configuration EME exposure

analysis included in "Appendix G" in this manual, or employing another suitable method

among those described in the current version of the EN50383 standard.

Once the occupational and general public compliance boundaries are determined, means to

ensure that workers and people are outside the respective boundaries, for instance using

appropriate signage or restricted access, should be implemented; if this is not possible or

practically achievable for the specific system configuration, the configuration should be

modified in order to make it possible. The R56 Standards and Guidelines for

Communications Sites (6881089E50) manual provides examples of signage that can be

used to identify the occupational or general public compliance boundaries.

Refer to product specific manuals for detailed safety and installation instructions. Manuals

can be obtained with product orders, downloaded from https://businessonline.motorola.com,

or purchased through the Motorola Aftermarket & Accessory Department.

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may

cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take

adequate measures.

Att ti

W A R N I N G

MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

Supplemental Safety and Installation Requirements

ATTENTION!

The MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater must be installed in a suitable, in-

building enclosure. A restricted access location is required when installing this equipment

into the end system.

The base station/repeater contains a Class 1 built-in power supply component. It is

equipped with an appliance inlet for connecting to an AC input, as well as DC input

terminals which meet SELV DC circuit requirements.

When installing the equipment, all requirements of relevant standards and local electrical

codes must be fulfilled.

The maximum operating ambient temperature of this equipment is 60°C. The maximum

operating altitude is 3000 meters above sea level.

The 28.6 VDC output from the power supply to the PA is at an energy hazard level

(exceeds 240 VA). When installing into the end system, care must be taken so as not to

touch the output wires.

When the MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater is used in a DC reverting system,

the DC power supply must be located in the same building as the MOTOTRBO MTR3000

Base Station/Repeater, and it must meet the requirements of a SELV circuit.

Environmental Information v

Environmental Information

Material Content

Disposal of your Electronic and Electric Equipment

Please do not dispose of electronic and electric equipment or electronic and electric accessories with

your household waste. In some countries or regions, collection systems have been set up to handle

waste of electrical and electronic equipment.

In European Union countries, please contact your local equipment supplier representative or service

center for information about the waste collection system in your country.

Disposal Guideline

The following symbol on a Motorola product indicates that the product should not be disposed of with

household waste.

Note The Motorola MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater system and its subsystems

have been created in compliance with the environmental goals of the European Union’s

Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) and the Waste Electrical and Electronic

Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC as well as Motorola’s corporate goals to

minimize environmental impact of its products.

This Motorola policy is reflected throughout the entire design, procurement, assembly, and

packaging process.

In support of these efforts to provide environmentally-responsible products, please comply

with the information in the following sections regarding product disposal for systems being

replaced.

vi Part 68 Information

Part 68 Information

Part 68 FCC Guideline

This section applies when the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater is equipped with the optional

Wireline Interface Board.

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.

On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the registration

number:

US:ABZNINANT3000

If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.

The connector used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must

comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant

connector is provided with this product. See installation instructions for details.

REN: N/A

Connector: RJ1DC

Authorized Network Port: 04NO2

Service Order Code: 7.0Y

If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in

advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not

practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of

your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures

that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide

advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, please refer to “Appendix B ”, “Appendix C ” or

“Appendix D ” for repair and warranty information. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone

network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is

resolved.

None of the circuit boards in this equipment are field repairable. For assistance in sending the

boards back for repair, please contact the Service Center listed in “Appendix B ”, “Appendix C ” or

“Appendix D ”.

This equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission,

public service commission or corporation commission for information.

vii

Document History

The following major changes have been implemented in this manual since the previous edition:

Edition Description Date

68007024096-A Initial Release January 2010

68007024096-B Updated Appendix B (Contact details for Middle

East and Africa), Added labels in Chapter 13 (Top

and Bottom Plate labels in Figure 13-6)

February 2010

68007024096-C Updated General Safety and Installation

Standards and Guidelines section, Added

Appendix G: MOTOTRBO Base Station/Repeater

– EME ASSESSMENT

April 2010

68007024096-D Added 800/900 MHz frequency band information August 2010

viii

Notes

Table of Contents ix

Table of Contents

Foreword..........................................................................................................i

General Safety Precautions..........................................................................................................................i

Computer Software Copyrights ....................................................................................................................i

Document Copyrights ...................................................................................................................................i

Disclaimer.....................................................................................................................................................i

Trademarks ..................................................................................................................................................i

General Safety and Installation Standards and Guidelines .......................ii

MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

Supplemental Safety and Installation Requirements.................................iv

Environmental Information............................................................................v

Material Content ..........................................................................................................................................v

Disposal of your Electronic and Electric Equipment ....................................................................................v

Disposal Guideline.......................................................................................................................................v

Part 68 Information........................................................................................vi

Part 68 FCC Guideline ...............................................................................................................................vi

Document History ....................................................................................... vii

Commercial Warranty ...............................................................................xxxi

Chapter 1 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater ....................................... 1-1

1.1 Notations Used in This Manual .................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Description................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2.1 Operating Features.......................................................................................................... 1-4

1.2.2 Features not offered ........................................................................................................ 1-6

1.2.3 Frequency Ranges and Power Levels............................................................................. 1-6

1.3 Specifications............................................................................................................................... 1-7

1.4 Theory of Operation..................................................................................................................... 1-9

1.5 Model Chart ............................................................................................................................... 1-11

1.6 Basic Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 1-12

xTable of Contents

Chapter 2 MTR3000 Receiver Module................................................. 2-1

2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1.1 Overview of Circuitry......................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1.2 Input and Output Connections .......................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Specifications............................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.3 Functional Theory of Operation ................................................................................................... 2-3

2.3.1 Functional Overview ........................................................................................................2-3

2.3.1.1 Receiver Front End Circuitry............................................................................. 2-3

2.3.1.2 Receiver Back End Circuitry ............................................................................. 2-4

2.3.1.3 Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) ................................................................. 2-4

2.3.1.4 Synthesizer Circuitry ......................................................................................... 2-4

2.3.1.5 Backend Receiver-specific IC Circuitry............................................................. 2-4

2.3.1.6 Memory Circuitry............................................................................................... 2-4

2.3.1.7 Analog to Digital (ADC) Converter Metering Circuitry....................................... 2-4

2.3.2 Data Communications ..................................................................................................... 2-5

2.3.2.1 Communications with Station Control Module .................................................. 2-5

2.3.2.2 ADC Converter Circuitry ................................................................................... 2-5

2.4 Basic Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 2-9

2.4.1 Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................. 2-9

Chapter 3 MTR3000 Exciter Module.................................................... 3-1

3.1 Description ................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1.1 Overview of Circuitry......................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1.2 Input and Output Connections .......................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Specifications............................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.3 Functional Theory of Operation ................................................................................................... 3-3

3.3.1 Functional Overview ........................................................................................................3-3

3.3.1.1 Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry ......................................................................... 3-3

3.3.1.1.1 Phase-Locked Loop.......................................................................... 3-3

3.3.1.1.2 Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)................................................. 3-4

3.3.1.1.3 Modulation ........................................................................................ 3-4

3.3.1.1.4 Amplifiers.......................................................................................... 3-4

3.3.1.1.5 RF Switch Circuitry ........................................................................... 3-4

3.3.1.2 Data Communications ...................................................................................... 3-4

3.3.1.2.1 Communications with Station Control Module.................................. 3-4

3.3.1.2.2 ADC Converter Circuitry ................................................................... 3-4

3.3.1.3 Voltage Regulation/Filtering Circuitry ............................................................... 3-4

3.4 Basic Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 3-7

3.4.1 Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................. 3-7

Table of Contents xi

Chapter 4 MTR3000 Power Amplifier .................................................. 4-1

4.1 Description................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1 General Description......................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1.1.1 Overview of Circuitry ........................................................................................ 4-1

4.1.1.2 Input and Output Connections.......................................................................... 4-2

4.2 Specifications............................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.3 Functional Theory Of Operation .................................................................................................. 4-3

4.4 Basic Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 4-7

4.4.1 Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................. 4-7

Chapter 5 MTR3000 Station Control Module...................................... 5-1

5.1 Description................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 General Description......................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1.1 Input and Output Connections.......................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Functional Theory of Operation ................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2.1 Tx OMAP ......................................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2.1.1 External Memory .............................................................................................. 5-3

5.2.1.1.1 RAM ................................................................................................. 5-3

5.2.1.1.2 Flash................................................................................................. 5-3

5.2.1.2 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) ....................................................................... 5-3

5.2.1.3 Station Reference............................................................................................. 5-4

5.2.2 Rx OMAP......................................................................................................................... 5-4

5.2.3 MAKO .............................................................................................................................. 5-5

5.2.4 Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA)......................................................................... 5-5

5.2.5 Audio ............................................................................................................................... 5-5

5.2.6 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 5-7

5.2.7 Backplane Interface Board .............................................................................................. 5-7

5.2.8 Exciter.............................................................................................................................. 5-7

5.2.9 Receiver .......................................................................................................................... 5-7

5.2.10 Front Panel (FP) Connectors........................................................................................... 5-8

5.2.11 Front Panel LEDs ..........................................................................................................5-10

5.2.12 Supply Voltage Circuitry ................................................................................................ 5-10

5.3 Basic Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 5-13

5.3.1 Replacement Procedure................................................................................................ 5-13

5.3.2 Post-Replacement Optimization Procedure .................................................................. 5-13

Chapter 6 MTR3000 Backplane ........................................................... 6-1

6.1 Description................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 General Description......................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1.1 Location of Backplane Interface Board Connectors ......................................... 6-3

6.1.1.2 Backplane Interface Board Connectors Information ......................................... 6-4

6.2 Basic Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 6-26

6.2.1 Replacement Procedure................................................................................................ 6-26

6.2.2 Fuse Check and Replacement Procedure..................................................................... 6-26

6.2.2.1 14.2 VDC Internal and 14.2 VDC Accessory.................................................. 6-26

xii Table of Contents

Chapter 7 MTR3000 Power Supply...................................................... 7-1

7.1 Description ................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1.1 Identification of Inputs/Outputs ......................................................................... 7-2

7.2 Specifications............................................................................................................................... 7-3

7.3 Functional Theory Of Operation................................................................................................... 7-4

7.3.1 Supply Circuitry................................................................................................................ 7-4

7.3.1.1 Output Over-Current Protection ........................................................................ 7-4

7.3.1.2 Over-Voltage Detection and Shutdown ............................................................ 7-4

7.3.1.3 AC Fail Detect................................................................................................... 7-4

7.3.1.4 Fan Control ....................................................................................................... 7-4

7.3.1.5 Over-temperature Protection ............................................................................ 7-4

7.4 Basic Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 7-7

7.4.1 Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................. 7-7

7.4.2 Basic Voltage Check Procedure ...................................................................................... 7-7

Chapter 8 MTR3000 Wireline ............................................................... 8-1

8.1 Description ................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1.1 Input and Output Connections .......................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Specifications............................................................................................................................... 8-3

8.3 Functional Theory Of Operation................................................................................................... 8-3

8.3.1 Functional Overview ........................................................................................................8-3

8.3.1.1 FPGA ................................................................................................................ 8-3

8.3.1.2 CODEC............................................................................................................. 8-3

8.3.1.3 DC Control Decoder ......................................................................................... 8-4

8.3.1.4 Surge Protection ............................................................................................... 8-4

8.3.1.5 Impedance Matching Network .......................................................................... 8-4

8.3.1.6 Backplane SPI Bus ........................................................................................... 8-5

8.3.1.7 GPIO Signals .................................................................................................... 8-5

8.3.2 Board Configuration......................................................................................................... 8-6

8.3.2.1 Jumper Configuration ....................................................................................... 8-6

8.3.2.2 CPS configuration............................................................................................. 8-7

8.3.2.2.1 Choosing a Remote Control Mode ................................................... 8-8

8.3.2.2.2 Other Wireline Configuration Options ............................................. 8-11

8.4 Basic Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 8-15

8.4.1 LEDs .............................................................................................................................. 8-15

8.4.2 Tone Remote Control .................................................................................................... 8-17

8.4.3 DC Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 8-20

Table of Contents xiii

Chapter 9 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS)

Equipment .............................................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Description................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1 General Description......................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors ................................................................ 9-1

9.1.1.2 Duplexer ........................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1.3 External Dual Circulator Tray ........................................................................... 9-2

9.1.1.4 Antenna Relay .................................................................................................. 9-4

9.2 Specifications............................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.2.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors ............................................................................... 9-5

9.2.2 Duplexer .......................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.2.3 External Dual Circulator Tray .......................................................................................... 9-6

9.2.4 Antenna Relay ................................................................................................................. 9-7

9.3 Functional Theory of Operation ................................................................................................... 9-8

9.3.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors ............................................................................... 9-8

9.3.2 Antenna Relay ................................................................................................................. 9-8

9.3.3 External Dual Circulator Tray .......................................................................................... 9-8

9.3.4 Duplexer .......................................................................................................................... 9-9

9.4 Basic Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 9-9

9.4.1 Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................. 9-9

9.4.1.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors ................................................................ 9-9

9.4.1.2 Duplexer ........................................................................................................... 9-9

9.4.1.3 External Dual Circulator Tray ......................................................................... 9-10

9.4.1.4 Antenna Relay ................................................................................................ 9-12

9.5 Field Tuning Procedures............................................................................................................ 9-12

9.5.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors ............................................................................. 9-12

9.5.1.1 External Preselector Tuning Procedure (with basic instruments) ................... 9-12

9.5.1.1.1 Test Equipment .............................................................................. 9-12

9.5.1.1.2 Calculating Proper Alignment Frequency....................................... 9-13

9.5.1.1.3 Preparing Equipment...................................................................... 9-13

9.5.1.1.4 Tuning Procedure ........................................................................... 9-14

9.5.1.2 External Preselector Tuning Procedure (with advanced instruments)............ 9-16

9.5.1.2.1 Test Equipment .............................................................................. 9-16

9.5.1.2.2 Equipment Setup ............................................................................ 9-16

9.5.1.2.3 Tuning procedures and methods.................................................... 9-17

9.5.2 Duplexer ........................................................................................................................ 9-28

9.5.2.1 Duplexer Tuning Procedure (with basic instruments) ..................................... 9-28

9.5.2.1.1 Test Equipment .............................................................................. 9-28

9.5.2.1.2 Setting Up for Tuning Duplexer ...................................................... 9-29

9.5.2.1.3 Duplexer Tuning Procedure ........................................................... 9-30

9.5.2.2 Duplexer Tuning Procedure (with advanced instruments).............................. 9-36

9.5.2.2.1 Initial Settings ................................................................................. 9-36

9.5.2.2.2 Tuning the LO side ......................................................................... 9-36

9.5.2.2.3 Tuning the HI side .......................................................................... 9-38

9.5.2.2.4 Fine Tuning the Duplexer ............................................................... 9-39

xiv Table of Contents

Chapter 10 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade........................... 10-1

10.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Unpacking .................................................................................................................................. 10-2

10.2.1 Equipment Unpacking and Inspection ........................................................................... 10-2

10.2.1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 10-2

10.2.1.2 Unpacking Equipment..................................................................................... 10-2

10.2.1.3 Analog to Digital Migration Path – Removal and Replacement ...................... 10-3

10.3 New Connections....................................................................................................................... 10-5

10.3.1 AUX Connector.............................................................................................................. 10-7

10.3.2 System Connector ......................................................................................................... 10-7

10.3.3 Telephone Line Connections ......................................................................................... 10-7

10.3.4 Station Maintenance Connections ................................................................................. 10-7

10.4 Operational Verification.............................................................................................................. 10-8

10.4.1 Applying Power.............................................................................................................. 10-8

10.4.2 Alignment and Configuration ......................................................................................... 10-8

10.4.3 Optimizing Tasks ........................................................................................................... 10-8

10.4.4 Verifying Radio Operation.............................................................................................. 10-8

10.4.5 Verifying Proper Operation ............................................................................................ 10-8

Chapter 11 MTR3000 Test Equipment And Service Aids.................. 11-1

11.1 Recommended Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 11-1

11.2 Service Aids ............................................................................................................................... 11-2

Chapter 12 MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing ....................... 12-1

12.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Verifying Transmitter Circuitry.................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2.2 Test Equipment.............................................................................................................. 12-1

12.2.3 Verifying Transmitter Circuitry Procedure...................................................................... 12-2

12.2.3.1 Station Reset .................................................................................................. 12-3

12.2.3.2 Station Unable to Power Up with Live DC or AC mains ................................. 12-3

12.3 Verifying Receiver Circuitry........................................................................................................ 12-5

12.3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 12-5

12.3.2 Required Test Equipment .............................................................................................. 12-5

12.3.3 Verifying Receiver Circuitry Procedure.......................................................................... 12-6

Table of Contents xv

Chapter 13 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning................................ 13-1

13.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 13-1

13.2 Customer Programming Software Setup ................................................................................... 13-1

13.3 Base Station/Repeater Tuning Setup ........................................................................................ 13-3

13.4 Tuning Setup (MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade)........................................................... 13-3

13.4.1 MTR2000 Calibration Coefficient Entry ......................................................................... 13-3

13.4.1.1 Tuning Procedure ........................................................................................... 13-4

13.4.1.2 Verification or Test Procedure for High Power ............................................... 13-5

13.5 Tuning Setup (Wireline) ............................................................................................................. 13-5

13.5.1 Wireline Receive Level Tuning ...................................................................................... 13-5

13.5.1.1 Tuning Procedure ........................................................................................... 13-5

13.5.2 Wireline Rx Equalization – 2800 Hz Tuning .................................................................. 13-6

13.5.2.1 Tuning Procedure ........................................................................................... 13-7

13.5.3 Wireline Rx Equalization – 400 Hz Tuning .................................................................... 13-9

13.5.3.1 Tuning Procedure ........................................................................................... 13-9

13.5.4 Wireline Transmit Level Tuning ................................................................................... 13-10

13.5.4.1 Tuning Procedure ......................................................................................... 13-10

13.5.5 Wireline Squelch Level Tuning .................................................................................... 13-12

13.5.5.1 Tuning Procedure ......................................................................................... 13-12

13.6 Modulation Limit Alignment...................................................................................................... 13-14

13.6.1 Tuning Procedure (with no Tx Data and no PL) .......................................................... 13-14

13.6.2 Verification (with no Tx Data and no PL) ..................................................................... 13-15

13.6.3 Tuning Procedure (with Tx Data or PL)....................................................................... 13-16

13.6.4 Verification (with Tx Data or PL).................................................................................. 13-17

Chapter 14 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly . 14-1

14.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 14-1

14.2 Routine Maintenance................................................................................................................. 14-1

14.3 Preventive Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 14-1

14.3.1 Inspection ...................................................................................................................... 14-1

14.3.2 Cleaning Procedures ..................................................................................................... 14-1

14.3.3 Station Reference Alignment Procedure ....................................................................... 14-2

14.4 Safe Handling of CMOS Devices...............................................................................................14-3

14.5 Repair Procedures and Techniques – General ......................................................................... 14-4

14.6 Disassembly and Reassembly – General .................................................................................. 14-5

14.7 Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed ................................................................................. 14-5

14.7.1 Front Bezel Disassembly and Reassembly ................................................................... 14-5

14.7.2 Module Disassembly and Reassembly.......................................................................... 14-6

14.7.2.1 Fans................................................................................................................ 14-6

14.7.2.2 Power Amplifier Module.................................................................................. 14-7

14.7.2.3 Power Supply Module..................................................................................... 14-8

14.7.2.4 Exciter Module................................................................................................ 14-9

14.7.2.5 Station Control Module ................................................................................. 14-11

14.7.2.6 Receiver Module........................................................................................... 14-12

14.7.2.7 External Preselector Module ........................................................................ 14-12

14.7.2.8 Backplane Interface Board ........................................................................... 14-12

14.7.2.9 Wireline Interface Board ............................................................................... 14-14

14.8 Exploded Mechanical View ...................................................................................................... 14-15

14.9 Parts List.................................................................................................................................. 14-16

14.10 Torque Chart............................................................................................................................ 14-17

xvi Table of Contents

Appendix A Accessories .........................................................................A-1

A.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................A-1

A.1.1 MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Ordering Guideline ....................................................................A-1

A.1.1.1 Base Station/Repeater......................................................................................A-1

A.1.1.2 Frequency .........................................................................................................A-1

A.1.1.3 Duplexer ...........................................................................................................A-1

A.1.1.4 Preselector........................................................................................................A-2

A.1.1.5 Dual Circulator ..................................................................................................A-2

A.1.1.6 Antenna Relay ..................................................................................................A-2

A.1.1.7 Power Cables ...................................................................................................A-2

A.1.1.8 Mounting Hardware ..........................................................................................A-2

A.1.1.9 Manual ..............................................................................................................A-2

A.1.1.10 Cables...............................................................................................................A-3

A.1.1.11 Software Upgrades ...........................................................................................A-3

A.1.1.11.1Capacity Plus ...................................................................................A-3

A.1.1.11.2Dynamic Mixed Mode (DMM) ...........................................................A-3

A.1.1.11.3IP Site Connect ................................................................................A-3

A.1.2 MOTOTRBO MTR3000 FRU...........................................................................................A-4

A.1.2.1 Power Amplifier, Exciter and Receiver .............................................................A-4

A.1.2.2 Power Supply....................................................................................................A-4

A.1.2.3 Control/Wireline/Backplane/Miscellaneous.......................................................A-4

A.1.2.4 Manuals ............................................................................................................A-4

A.1.2.5 Microphones/Speakers .....................................................................................A-5

A.1.2.6 Miscellaneous Accessories...............................................................................A-5

A.1.2.7 Antenna Relay Kits ...........................................................................................A-5

A.1.2.8 Preselector Cable Kits ......................................................................................A-5

A.1.2.9 Cabinets/Racks and Hardware .........................................................................A-6

A.1.3 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Upgrade Kit Ordering Guideline ................................................A-7

A.1.3.1 Upgrade Assembly ...........................................................................................A-7

A.1.3.2 Frequency .........................................................................................................A-7

A.1.4 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Upgrade Kit FRU.......................................................................A-8

A.1.4.1 Exciter and Receiver.........................................................................................A-8

A.1.4.2 Power Supply....................................................................................................A-8

A.1.4.3 Control/Miscellaneous ......................................................................................A-8

A.1.4.4 Manuals ............................................................................................................A-8

A.1.4.5 Cables...............................................................................................................A-8

Appendix B EMEA Warranty, Service and Technical Support.............B-1

B.1 Warranty and Service Support.....................................................................................................B-1

B.1.1 Warranty Period and Return Instructions.........................................................................B-1

B.1.2 After Warranty Period ......................................................................................................B-1

B.2 European Radio Support Centre (ERSC) ....................................................................................B-2

B.3 Piece Parts...................................................................................................................................B-2

B.4 Technical Support ........................................................................................................................B-3

B.5 Further Assistance From Motorola...............................................................................................B-3

Table of Contents xvii

Appendix C LACR Replacement Parts Ordering and Motorola Service

Centers ..............................................................................................C-1

C.1 Commercial Warranty ..................................................................................................................C-1

Limited Warranty .....................................................................................................................................C-1

MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS ...........................................................................C-1

I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long ..................................................................C-1

II. General Provisions ..............................................................................................................C-2

III. How To Get Warranty Service............................................................................................C-2

IV. What This Warranty Does Not Cover.................................................................................C-2

V. Governing Law....................................................................................................................C-3

C.2 Replacement Parts Ordering .......................................................................................................C-3

C.2.1 Basic Ordering Information..............................................................................................C-3

C.2.2 Motorola Online ...............................................................................................................C-3

C.3 Motorola Service Centers ............................................................................................................C-3

C.3.1 Servicing Information.......................................................................................................C-3

C.3.2 Motorola de México, S.A. ................................................................................................C-3

C.3.3 Motorola de Colombia, Ltd. .............................................................................................C-3

Appendix D NAG Replacement Parts Ordering and Motorola Service

Centers ..............................................................................................D-1

D.1 Commercial Warranty ..................................................................................................................D-1

Limited Warranty .....................................................................................................................................D-1

MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS ...........................................................................D-1

I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long ..................................................................D-1

II. General Provisions ..............................................................................................................D-2

III. How To Get Warranty Service............................................................................................D-2

IV. What This Warranty Does Not Cover.................................................................................D-2

V. Governing Law....................................................................................................................D-2

D.2 Replacement Parts Ordering .......................................................................................................D-3

D.2.1 Basic Ordering Information..............................................................................................D-3

D.2.2 Motorola Online ...............................................................................................................D-3

D.2.3 Mail Orders ......................................................................................................................D-3

D.2.4 Telephone Orders............................................................................................................D-3

D.2.5 Fax Orders.......................................................................................................................D-3

D.2.6 Parts Identification ...........................................................................................................D-3

D.2.7 Product Customer Service...............................................................................................D-4

D.3 Motorola Service Centers ............................................................................................................D-4

D.3.1 Servicing Information.......................................................................................................D-4

D.3.2 Motorola Service Center..................................................................................................D-4

D.3.3 Motorola Federal Technical Center .................................................................................D-4

D.3.4 Motorola Canadian Technical Logistics Center ...............................................................D-4

xviii Table of Contents

Appendix E MTR3000 Third Party Controllers ...................................... E-1

E.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................E-1

E.2 Community Repeater Panel.........................................................................................................E-2

E.2.1 Description.......................................................................................................................E-2

E.2.2 Compatibility ....................................................................................................................E-2

E.2.3 Hardware Connections ....................................................................................................E-3

E.2.4 CPS Configuration ...........................................................................................................E-4

E.2.5 Community Repeater Panel Settings...............................................................................E-5

E.2.5.1 Discriminator .....................................................................................................E-5

E.2.5.2 Tx Audio............................................................................................................E-5

E.2.5.3 Continuous Tone-Controlled Squelch Systems (CTCSS) Out..........................E-6

E.2.5.4 Tx Audio Pre-Emphasis ....................................................................................E-6

E.2.5.5 Carrier Operated Relay (COR) .........................................................................E-6

E.3 Phone Patch ................................................................................................................................E-6

E.3.1 Description.......................................................................................................................E-6

E.3.2 Compatibility ....................................................................................................................E-6

E.3.3 Hardware Connections ....................................................................................................E-7

E.3.4 CPS Configuration ...........................................................................................................E-7

E.3.5 Phone Patch Level Settings.............................................................................................E-9

E.3.5.1 Disc...................................................................................................................E-9

E.3.5.2 Tx Audio............................................................................................................E-9

E.3.5.3 CTCSS / DCS DECODE INPUT / COR ............................................................E-9

E.4 Tone Remote Adapter................................................................................................................E-10

E.4.1 Description.....................................................................................................................E-10

E.4.2 Compatibility ..................................................................................................................E-10

E.4.3 Hardware Connections ..................................................................................................E-11

E.4.4 CPS Configuration .........................................................................................................E-12

E.4.5 Tone Remote Adapter settings ......................................................................................E-13

E.4.5.1 Radio Rx .........................................................................................................E-13

E.4.5.2 Radio Tx .........................................................................................................E-13

E.4.5.3 Channel Steering ............................................................................................E-14

E.4.5.4 Monitoring .......................................................................................................E-14

E.4.5.5 PTT .................................................................................................................E-14

E.4.5.6 Wildcard 1 (optional).......................................................................................E-14

E.5 Trunking Controllers...................................................................................................................E-14

E.5.1 Description.....................................................................................................................E-14

E.5.2 Compatibility ..................................................................................................................E-15

E.5.3 Hardware Connections ..................................................................................................E-16

E.5.4 CPS Configuration .........................................................................................................E-17

E.5.5 Trunking Controller Settings ..........................................................................................E-19

E.5.5.1 Discriminator ...................................................................................................E-19

E.5.5.2 Tx Audio..........................................................................................................E-19

E.5.5.3 Tx Data ...........................................................................................................E-19

Table of Contents xix

Appendix F Audio Enhancement ........................................................... F-1

F.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................... F-1

F.1.1 Hear Clear feature with the third party controllers ........................................................... F-1

F.1.2 Third party controller and the subscriber configuration for Hear Clear feature................ F-1

F.1.3 Hear Clear feature configuration in repeater mode ......................................................... F-2

F.1.4 Companding feature configuration between third party controllers and subscriber......... F-2

F.1.5 Companding feature configuration between the repeater and subscribers ..................... F-2

Appendix G MOTOTRBO Base Station/Repeater – EME ASSESSMENT ..

G-1

G.1 Executive Summary.................................................................................................................... G-1

G.2 Exposure Prediction Model......................................................................................................... G-1

G.2.1 Exposure in Front of the Antenna................................................................................... G-1

G.2.2 Exposure at Ground Level.............................................................................................. G-3

G.3 Typical System Configuration ..................................................................................................... G-4

G.4 Exposure Limits .......................................................................................................................... G-4

G.5 EME Exposure Evaluation .......................................................................................................... G-4

G.5.1 Exposure in Front of the Antenna................................................................................... G-4

G.5.2 Exposure at Ground Level.............................................................................................. G-4

G.6 Compliance Boundary Description ............................................................................................. G-5

G.7 References ................................................................................................................................. G-5

Glossary of Terms and Acronyms............................................... Glossary-1

xx Table of Contents

Notes

List of Figures xxi

List of Figures

Figure 1-4 RDAC Diagnostic Screen................................................................................................... 1-12

Figure 2-1 UHF Receiver Module Input/Output ..................................................................................... 2-2

Figure 2-2 UHF Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram................................................................ 2-7

Figure 2-3 800/900 MHz Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram.................................................. 2-8

Figure 3-1 UHF Exciter Module Input/Output ........................................................................................ 3-2

Figure 3-2 Exciter Module Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................... 3-5

Figure 4-1 PA Input/Output.................................................................................................................... 4-2

Figure 4-2 Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................... 4-5

Figure 5-1 Station Control Module Indicators and Input/Output Connections ....................................... 5-2

Figure 5-2. Station Control Module (SCM) Audio Path........................................................................... 5-6

Figure 5-2 Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram - Station Control Circuitry.................... 5-11

Figure 6-1 Backplane Interface Board................................................................................................... 6-2

Figure 6-2 Backplane Interface Board Connector Locations (Front and Rear View) ............................ 6-3

Figure 6-3 Rear view with fuse cover plate removed .......................................................................... 6-26

Figure 7-1 Power Supply Input/Output Connections ............................................................................. 7-2

Figure 7-2 Power Supply Functional Block Diagram ............................................................................. 7-5

Figure 7-3 Measuring 14.2 VDC and 5.1 VDC (other voltmeter probe to chassis)................................ 7-7

Figure 7-4 Pin-out of connector (measuring 14.2 VDC and 5.1 VDC)................................................... 7-7

Figure 7-5 Measuring 14.2 VDC and 28.6 VDC (other voltmeter probe to chassis).............................. 7-8

Figure 7-6 Pin-out of connector (measuring 14.2 VDC and 28.6 VDC)................................................. 7-8

Figure 8-1 Wireline Board Jumpers and Input/Output Connections ...................................................... 8-2

Figure 8-2 Location of jumpers on the P8 connector ............................................................................ 8-6

Figure 8-3 Choosing Remote Control Mode in CPS.............................................................................. 8-7

Figure 8-4 CPS configuration for Wireline board................................................................................... 8-8

Figure 8-5 GPIO Physical Pin Configuration in CPS (example shown above is for TRC15)................. 8-9

Figure 8-5 Wireline Functional Block Diagram .................................................................................... 8-13

Figure 8-6 Location of LEDs................................................................................................................ 8-16

Figure 8-7 Timing requirements for a Valid Tone Remote Control Sequence ..................................... 8-17

Figure 8-8 Valid amplitudes for Tone Remote Control signaling.......................................................... 8-18

Figure 9-1 UHF Base Station/Repeater Preselector.............................................................................. 9-1

Figure 9-2 Duplexer (UHF) .................................................................................................................... 9-2

Figure 9-3 Duplexer (800 MHz) ............................................................................................................. 9-2

Figure 9-4 External Dual Circulator Tray (UHF) .................................................................................... 9-2

Figure 9-5 External Dual Circulator Tray (800 MHz) ............................................................................. 9-3

Figure 9-6 Typical Antenna Relay Module – Inputs/Outputs ................................................................. 9-4

Figure 9-7 Test Equipment Setup for External Preselector Field Tuning............................................. 9-15

Figure 9-8 Connection of the 435–470 MHz band preselector............................................................ 9-18

Figure 9-9 Initial curve (Start 400 MHz, Stop 620 MHz) ...................................................................... 9-19

Figure 9-10 Initial curve (Start 400 MHz, Stop 505 MHz) ...................................................................... 9-19

Figure 9-11 Passband tuning of tuning screw 4 ....................................................................................9-20

Figure 9-12 Passband tuned to required range (tuning screw 4) .......................................................... 9-21

Figure 9-13 Passband tuning of tuning screw 3 ....................................................................................9-22

Figure 9-14 Passband tuned to required range (tuning screw 3) .......................................................... 9-22

Figure 9-15 Passband tuned to required range (tuning screw 2) .......................................................... 9-23

Figure 9-16 Passband and return loss after rough tuning ..................................................................... 9-24

Figure 9-17 Return loss......................................................................................................................... 9-24

Figure 9-18 Turn screw clockwise ......................................................................................................... 9-25

Figure 9-19 Turn screw counter clockwise ............................................................................................ 9-25

Figure 9-20 Result after fine tuning ....................................................................................................... 9-26

Figure 9-21 Inspect against mask template .......................................................................................... 9-27

xxii List of Figures

Figure 9-22 Preliminary Tasks Prior to Tuning Duplexer ....................................................................... 9-29

Figure 9-23 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure .............................................................................. 9-31

Figure 9-24 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued) ........................................................... 9-32

Figure 9-25 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued) ........................................................... 9-33

Figure 9-26 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued) ........................................................... 9-34

Figure 9-27 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued) ........................................................... 9-35

Figure 9-28 Untuned LO SIDE–Cavity 1 ............................................................................................... 9-37

Figure 9-29 Tuned CH1 - LO SIDE–Cavity 1 ........................................................................................ 9-37

Figure 9-30 Tuned CH1, CH2 - LO SIDE–Cavity 1 ............................................................................... 9-38

Figure 9-31 Untuned HI SIDE–Cavity 4 ................................................................................................ 9-38

Figure 9-32 Tuned CH1 - HI SIDE–Cavity 4.......................................................................................... 9-38

Figure 9-33 Tuned CH1, CH2 - HI SIDE–Cavity 4 ................................................................................ 9-39

Figure 9-34 LO Side Response Curves ................................................................................................ 9-39

Figure 9-35 HI Side Response Curves.................................................................................................. 9-40

Figure 9-36 After Fine Tuning–LO Side Response Curves ................................................................... 9-40

Figure 9-37 After Fine Tuning–HI Side Response Curves .................................................................... 9-41

Figure 9-38 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued) ........................................................... 9-41

Figure 10-1 Removing Front Bezel ....................................................................................................... 10-3

Figure 10-2 Removing RF cable ........................................................................................................... 10-3

Figure 10-3 Removing two screws securing the Transceiver Assembly ............................................... 10-4

Figure 10-4 Putting together new SCM, Exciter and Receiver .............................................................. 10-4

Figure 10-5 Location to affix the MTR3000 FCC upgrade label ............................................................ 10-5

Figure 10-6 Location to affix the Part 68 label....................................................................................... 10-5

Figure 12-1 Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Transmitter Circuitry................................................... 12-4

Figure 12-2 Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Receiver Circuit.......................................................... 12-7

Figure 12-3 Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Receiver Circuit (Continued)...................................... 12-8

Figure 13-1 Customer Programming Software Setup from Rear Accessory Connector ....................... 13-1

Figure 13-2 Front view (without front bezel) of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater ................................ 13-2

Figure 13-3 Rear view of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater ................................................................. 13-2

Figure 13-4 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Tuning Equipment Setup.............................................. 13-3

Figure 13-5 Tx Menu tree (Tuning Procedure) ......................................................................................13-4

Figure 13-6 Rx Menu tree (Wireline Receive Level).............................................................................. 13-5

Figure 13-7 Rx Menu tree (Wireline Rx Equalization – 2800 Hz).......................................................... 13-7

Figure 13-8 Rx Menu tree (Wireline Rx Equalization – 400 Hz)............................................................ 13-9

Figure 13-9 Tx Menu tree (Wireline Transmit Level) ........................................................................... 13-11

Figure 13-10 Tx Menu tree (Wireline Squelch Level) ............................................................................ 13-13

Figure 13-11 Tx Menu tree (Tuning Procedure with no Tx data)........................................................... 13-14

Figure 13-12 Example of maximum deviation limit calculation.............................................................. 13-16

Figure 14-1 Removing Front Bezel ....................................................................................................... 14-5

Figure 14-2 Removing five screws from PA fan .................................................................................... 14-6

Figure 14-3 Removing four screws from PS fan.................................................................................... 14-6

Figure 14-4 Removing two cables from the front...................................................................................14-7

Figure 14-5 Removing three cables from the back................................................................................ 14-8

Figure 14-6 Removing Top and Bottom Plates...................................................................................... 14-9

Figure 14-7 Sliding Station Control transceiver assembly out ............................................................. 14-10

Figure 14-8 Removing screws securing Exciter Module, Receiver Module and SCM ........................ 14-11

Figure 14-9 Removing ribbon cable and Wireline connector............................................................... 14-13

Figure 14-10 Removing metal shield/metal cover ................................................................................. 14-13

Figure 14-11 Location to affix the Part 68 label..................................................................................... 14-14

Figure 14-12 MTR3000 Assembly Exploded View ................................................................................ 14-15

Figure E-1 CPS settings to configure MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater for analog mode....................E-2

Figure E-2 Model Zetron 38 Repeater Panel .........................................................................................E-2

Figure E-3 Signal Connections between MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater and Community Repeater

Panel....................................................................................................................................E-3

Figure E-4 CPS Configuration for Community Repeater Panel (1 of 2).................................................E-4

List of Figures xxiii

Figure E-5 CPS Configuration for Community Repeater Panel (2 of 2).................................................E-5

Figure E-6 Zetron Model 30 Phone Patch .............................................................................................E-6

Figure E-7 Signal Connections between MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater and Zetron Model 30 Phone

Patch....................................................................................................................................E-7

Figure E-8 CPS Configuration for Phone Patch (1 of 2) ........................................................................E-8

Figure E-9 CPS Configuration for Phone Patch (2 of 2) ........................................................................E-9

Figure E-10 Model L3276 Tone Remote Adapter ..................................................................................E-10

Figure E-11 Signal Connections between MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater and

Motorola L3276 25-Pin connector ...................................................................................... E-11

Figure E-12 CPS Configuration for L3276 Tone Remote Adapter .........................................................E-13

Figure E-13 Model Trident’s Marauder ..................................................................................................E-14

Figure E-14 Model Trident’s Raider .......................................................................................................E-15

Figure E-15 Model Trident’s NTS ..........................................................................................................E-15

Figure E-16 Signal connections between MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater, Trident Model Raider,

Marauder and NTS ............................................................................................................E-17

Figure E-17 CPS Configuration for Trident Model Raider, Marauder and NTS .....................................E-18

Figure G-1 Reference frame for the point of interest (POI) cylindrical co-ordinates ............................. G-2

Figure G-2 Schematic of the ground-level exposure model adopted for the assessment..................... G-3

Figure G-3 Compliance boundary for general public (GP) and occupational (OCC) exposure............. G-5

xxiv List of Figures

Notes

List of Tables xxv

List of Tables

Table 1-5 Factory ID Model Numbers ................................................................................................ 1-11

Table 1-6 Sales Model ....................................................................................................................... 1-11

Table 1-7 System Software Options................................................................................................... 1-11

Table 1-8 Front Panel LED indicators ................................................................................................ 1-13

Table 1-9 MTR3000 Software and Hardware Controlled LEDs ......................................................... 1-14

Table 2-1 Specifications of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater’s Receiver ........................................... 2-3

Table 3-1 Specifications of Exciter Module .......................................................................................... 3-3

Table 4-1 Specifications of Power Amplifier......................................................................................... 4-3

Table 5-1 Station Control Module (SCM) FPGA output Frequencies................................................... 5-4

Table 5-2 Station Control Module (SCM) FCC Frequency Stability Requirement ................................ 5-4

Table 5-3 Station Control Module (SCM) Audio Level.......................................................................... 5-6

Table 5-4 Station Control Module (SCM) FP Connectors .................................................................... 5-8

Table 5-5 Station Control Module (SCM) FP USB Connector Pin-out ................................................. 5-8

Table 5-6 Station Control Module (SCM) FP Microphone Connector Pin-out ...................................... 5-9

Table 5-7 Station Control Module (SCM) FP Speaker Connector Pin-out............................................ 5-9

Table 5-8 Station Control Module (SCM) FP Ethernet Connector Pin-out ......................................... 5-10

Table 5-9 Station Control Module (SCM) FP External Reference Connector Pin-out ........................ 5-10

Table 6-1 Assigned Connector Number Vs. Function/Location Information ........................................ 6-4

Table 6-2 Backplane Interface Board Signal Descriptions ................................................................... 6-5

Table 6-3 J5 System Connector, Row A Pins ...................................................................................... 6-8

Table 6-4 J5 System Connector, Row B Pins ...................................................................................... 6-9

Table 6-5 J5 System Connector, Row C Pins .................................................................................... 6-10

Table 6-6 J4 Wireline Connector, Row A Pins ................................................................................... 6-11

Table 6-7 J4 Wireline Connector, Row B Pins ................................................................................... 6-12

Table 6-8 J4 Wireline Connector, Row C Pins ................................................................................... 6-13

Table 6-9 J3 Controller Connector, Row A Pins................................................................................. 6-14

Table 6-10 J3 Controller Connector, Row B Pins................................................................................. 6-15

Table 6-11 J3 Controller Connector, Row C Pins................................................................................. 6-16

Table 6-12 J2 Option 2 Connector, Row A Pins................................................................................... 6-17

Table 6-13 J2 Option 2 Connector, Row B Pins................................................................................... 6-18

Table 6-14 J2 Option 2 Connector, Row C Pins................................................................................... 6-19

Table 6-15 J1 Option 1 Connector, Row A Pins................................................................................... 6-20

Table 6-16 J1 Option 1 Connector, Row B Pins................................................................................... 6-21

Table 6-17 J1 Option1 Connector, Row C Pins.................................................................................... 6-22

Table 6-18 P7 PA Control Connector ................................................................................................... 6-23

Table 6-19 P8 Power Supply Connector.............................................................................................. 6-23

Table 6-20 P10 Antenna Relay/PTemp+ Connector ............................................................................ 6-23

Table 6-21 J6 Terminal Block Stacking Connector............................................................................... 6-24

Table 6-22 J7 Aux Connector .............................................................................................................. 6-24

Table 7-1 Power Supply AC Performance Specifications .................................................................... 7-3

Table 7-2 Power Supply DC Performance Specifications .................................................................... 7-3

Table 8-1 Specifications of Wireline board........................................................................................... 8-3

Table 8-2 Impedance supported by Wireline board ............................................................................. 8-4

Table 8-3 Wireline Board Jumper Settings........................................................................................... 8-6

Table 8-4 CPS mapping table (TRC15) ............................................................................................. 8-10

Table 8-5 CPS mapping table (TRC7) ...............................................................................................8-10

Table 8-6 CPS mapping table (DC Remote) ...................................................................................... 8-10

Table 8-7 Wireline CPS definitions..................................................................................................... 8-11

Table 8-8 Wireline LED Indicators...................................................................................................... 8-15

Table 8-9 Function Tone Definition Table (Console) (TRC15)............................................................ 8-19

Table 8-10 Function Tone Definition Table (Console) (TRC7).............................................................. 8-20

Table 8-11 Function Tone Definition Table (Console) (TRC7).............................................................. 8-20

Table 9-1 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Preselector Filter Specifications ..................................... 9-5

Table 9-3 MTR3000 Duplexer Specifications (UHF) ............................................................................ 9-5

Table 9-5 MTR3000 External Dual Circulator Specifications (UHF)..................................................... 9-6

xxvi List of Tables

Table 9-4 MTR3000 Duplexer Specifications (800/900 MHz) .............................................................. 9-6

Table 9-6 MTR3000 External Dual Circulator Specifications (800 MHz).............................................. 9-7

Table 9-7 MTR3000 Antenna Relay Specifications.............................................................................. 9-7

Table 9-8 Marker setup table for 380–435 MHz ................................................................................. 9-16

Table 9-9 Marker setup table for 435–470 MHz ................................................................................. 9-17

Table 9-10 Marker setup table for 470–524 MHz ................................................................................. 9-17

Table 9-11 Frequency Range (U04, U05, U06, U07) ........................................................................... 9-36

Table 10-1 Station Maintenance Connections on the SCM.................................................................. 10-7

Table 11-1 Recommended Test Equipment ......................................................................................... 11-1

Table 11-2 Service Aids ....................................................................................................................... 11-2

Table 14-1 Lead Free Solder Wire Part Number List ........................................................................... 14-4

Table 14-2 Lead Free Solder Paste Part Number List ......................................................................... 14-4

Table 14-3 MTR3000 Exploded View Parts List................................................................................. 14-16

Table 14-4 Torque Specifications for Nuts and Screws...................................................................... 14-17

List of Tables xxvii

Related Publications

MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Installation and User Manual ..................... 68007024098

MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Detailed Service Manual............................ 68007024097

xxviii List of Tables

Notes

Summary of Bands Available xxix

Summary of Bands Available

Table below lists the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater bands available in this manual. For details, please

refer to the Model Charts section.

The following table lists the MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade bands that are available in this manual.

Frequency Band Bandwidth Power Level

UHF 403–470 MHz 8–100 W

470–524 MHz 8–100 W

800/900 MHz Rx : 806–825 MHz & 896–902 MHz –

Tx : 851–870 MHz & 935–941 MHz 8–100 W

Frequency Band Bandwidth Power Level

UHF 403–435 MHz 1–30 W (low power)

2–40 W (low power)

25–100 W (high power)

435–470 MHz 1–30 W (low power)

2–40 W (low power)

25–100 W (high power)

800 MHz Rx : 806–825 MHz –

Tx : 851–870 MHz 20–75 W

900 MHz Rx : 896–902 MHz –

Tx : 935–941 MHz 20–75 W

xxx

Notes

Commercial Warranty xxxi

Commercial Warranty

For details on the regional Motorola Service Centers, Replacement Parts Ordering and Technical Support

assistance, refer to the relevant regions in the Appendix section of this manual.

Notes

xxxii Commercial Warranty

Chapter 1 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

1.1 Notations Used in This Manual

Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of WARNING, CAUTION and Note

notations. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and due care must be

taken and observed.

1.2 Description

The Motorola MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater (BR) provides a modular, flexible analog and digital

station designed for today's communication systems and for the future. The station is available for

use in these configurations:

• Analog Conventional

• Digital (MOTOTRBO)

- MOTOTRBO DMR Tier 2 Conventional – Single Site

- MOTOTRBO DMR Tier 2 Conventional – IP Site Connect

- MOTOTRBO Capacity Plus Trunking

- MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Trunking

- MOTOTRBO Dynamic Mixed Mode (DMM)

- MOTOTRBO Transmit Interrupt

•LTR Trunking

• Passport Trunking

The base station/repeater can either be configured as a stand-alone base station/repeater or as a

base station/repeater connected to a back-end network, as in the case of operating in IP Site

Connect mode. As a base station/repeater, it listens on one uplink frequency, and then re-transmits

on a downlink frequency, thus providing the RF interface to the field subscribers. When configured

for analog station operation, the base station/repeater is designed to operate with most existing

analog systems, which enables a smooth migration to the MOTOTRBO system.

Note An operational procedure, practice, or condition which is essential to emphasize.

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

not avoided, might result in equipment damage.

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

if not avoided, could result in death or injury.

C a u t i o n

W A R N I N G

1-2 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Description

When configured for digital operation, the base station/repeater offers additional services. The digital

base station/repeater operates in TDMA mode, which essentially divides one channel into two virtual

channels using time slots; therefore the user capacity is doubled. The base station/repeater utilizes

embedded signaling to inform the field radios of the busy/idle status of each channel (time slot), the

type of traffic, and even the source and destination information.

The MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater is divided into functional modules that separate the frequency

band specific and transmitter power specific circuits from other circuits and has separate modules for

the control interface. These modules are self contained functional blocks with module-specific

alarms. This design facilitates the field replaceable unit (FRU) concept of field repair to maximize

system uptime.

The FRU architecture also allows another important feature, which is the upgrading of an existing

MTR2000 Base Station/Repeater to support MOTOTRBO functionality. With MTR2000 MOTOTRBO

Digital Upgrade kit, a current user of the MTR2000 Base Station/Repeater can upgrade their base

station/repeater to support all MOTOTRBO digital functionality as that of a factory produced

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater.

Currently, the MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade supports the following:

• UHF : 1–30 W (low power), 2–40 W (low power) and 25–100 W (high power)

• 800/900 MHz : 20–75 W

Once the upgrade is performed, the MTR2000 or MTR3000 Wireline and Auxiliary I/O board

functionality will no longer be supported.

A MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade comprises the following:

• New Exciter Module

• New Receiver Module

• New Station Control Module

• New Front Bezel

• Regulatory Sticker

Refer to Figure 1-1 for the front view (with front bezel) and Figure 1-2 for the front view (without front

bezel) of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater. Figure 1-3 shows the rear view portion of the base

station/repeater.

Note When configured in Digital Mode, the base station/repeater can only be used as a repeater.

Note A MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Upgrade will only support the MTR3000 wireline card if the

backplane interface board is replaced by model DLN6721.

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Description 1-3

Figure 1-1 Front view (with front bezel) of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

Figure 1-2 Front view (without front bezel) of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

Figure 1-3 Rear view of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

The MTR3000 model ships pre configured for analog conventional operation. Additional

configurations can be selected and created through the Customer Programming Software (CPS) on

a per-channel basis, based on the modulation type selected during station configuration.

Front Bezel

Front Panel LED Indicators

Speaker Port

Microphone Port

USB Port

Power Supply

Module

Power Amplifier

Module

Station Control Module

Exciter Module Receiver Module

Backplane

Interface Board

1-4 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Description

1.2.1 Operating Features

The following are the standard features of a MTR3000 model:

• MOTOTRBO Conventional Operation (2-Slot TDMA, 4FSK Modulation)

• Analog Conventional Operation (FM)

• Continuous Duty Cycle Operation over -30°C to +60°C

• Meets or exceeds the following standards:

- TIA603D

-ETSI 086

-ETSI 113

- ETSI TS 102 361-1 Part 1: DMR Air Interface Protocol

- ETSI TS 102 361-2 Part 2: DMR Voice and Generic Services and Facilities

- ETSI TS 102 361-3 Part 3: DMR Packet Data Protocol

• Synthesized Frequency Generation

• Two Female N-type Antenna Connectors (Rx and Tx)

• Ethernet Port (Network)

• Front mounted USB Port (Service)

• Front mounted microphone port

• Front mounted speaker port

• 9 configurable GPIO/GPI ports

• Power for third party controllers (1 Amp)

• 1.5 PPM Frequency Stability (Temperature AND 1-Year Aging) (UHF)

• 0.1 PPM Frequency Stability (Temperature AND 1-Year Aging) (800/900 MHz)

• External Reference Capability

• Wireline Capability

• Switching Power Supply operates from 85–264 VAC (47–63 Hz)

• Multi-Power Source configurable (AC, DC, or AC with Battery Revert)

• Station Diagnostic Tests-Fixed Set of Tests Factory run upon Start-up

• Physical Dimensions: 5.25" H x 19" W x 16.5" D (133 x 483 x 419 mm) 3RU

• Weight: 40 pounds (19 kg) excluding cabinet or other peripheral equipment

Motorola Network Interface:

• IP Site Connect

• Repeater Diagnostics and Control (RDAC)

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Description 1-5

Third Party Controller Interface:

• Phone Patch

• Multi Coded Squelch Interface (Repeater Panel)

• Tone Remote Adapter

•LTR Trunking

• Passport Trunking

Optionally, the MTR3000 station may be configured with

• External Pre-selector (Not available for the 800/900 MHz band)

• Antenna Relay

• Duplexer

• External Dual Circulator Tray

• Integrated Tone Remote Control (with Wireline option)

•Integrated DC Remote Control (with Wireline option)

In addition, the following features are also included. These features are shipped in a preset

condition, but may be altered through the use of the CPS.

• 16 Tx/Rx Frequencies – Factory Programmed with 1 Tx, 1 Rx

• 12.5 kHz or 25 kHz Operation – Factory Programmed to 12.5 kHz

• 6.25e compliant

• 1 Tx and 1 Rx (PL or DPL) Squelch Code per channel – Factory Programmed to CSQ

• Base Station Identification (BSI) – Factory Programmed as BLANK

• Push-To-Talk (PTT) Priority – Factory Programmed to Repeat Path

Note The MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater only supports the third party controllers noted above

when it is configured in analog mode.

1-6 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Description

1.2.2 Features not offered

Please disregard any references to the following items.

• Auxiliary I/O Option Board

• Peripheral temperature sensing device

• Voting or standalone Receiver

• Simplex operation (Tx=Rx)

1.2.3 Frequency Ranges and Power Levels

The MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater and MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade is available in the

following frequency ranges and power levels as specified in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2.

Table 1-1 MTR3000 Frequency Ranges and Power Levels

Frequency

Band Bandwidth Power Level

UHF 403–470 MHz 8–100 W

470–524 MHz 8–100 W

800/900 MHz Rx : 806–825 MHz & 896–902 MHz –

Tx : 851–870 MHz & 935–941 MHz 8–100 W

Table 1-2 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade Frequency Ranges and Power Levels

Frequency

Band Bandwidth Power Level

UHF 403–435 MHz 1–30 W (low power)

2–40 W (low power)

25–100 W (high power)

435–470 MHz 1–30 W (low power)

2–40 W (low power)

25–100 W (high power)

800 MHz Rx : 806–825 MHz –

Tx : 851–870 MHz 20–75 W

900 MHz Rx : 896–902 MHz –

Tx : 935–941 MHz 20–75 W

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Specifications 1-7

1.3 Specifications

Table 1-3 shows the specifications of the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater.

Table 1-3 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater General Specifications (All Bands)

Parameter Specifications

Number of Channels 16

Frequency Generation Synthesized

Input Voltage AC 85–264 VAC (47–63 Hz)

Input Voltage DC UHF : 28.6 VDC (25.7–30.7 VDC full rated output power)

800/900 MHz : 28.6 VDC (24.7–30.7 VDC full rated output power)

Power Supply Type Switching

Station Weight 40 lbs (19 kg)

Temperature Range -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F)

Antenna Connectors Tx/Rx N-Type

Modes of Operation Half-Duplex / Duplex

Rack Units 3

Height 5.25” (133 mm)

Width 19” (483 mm)

Depth 16.5” (419 mm)

Table 1-4 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Specifications

Parameter

Specifications

UHF 800/900 MHz

Input Power (All Modulations)

100 W Standby (AC Line 117 V / 220 V) 0.4 A / 0.2 A 0.7 A / 0.4 A

100 W Transmit at Rated Power

(AC Line 117 V / 220 V)

3.3 A / 1.8 A 4.5 A / 2.5 A

100 W Standby (28 VDC) 0.8 A 1 A

100 W Transmit at Rated Power (28 VDC) 11.5 A 11.5 A

Frequency Reference

Internal Frequency Stability (PPM) 1.5 PPM 0.1 PPM

External Reference Capable Yes Yes

Frequency Bands

Electronic Bandwidth 403–470 MHz (UHF R1),

470–524 MHz (UHF R2)

Rx : 806–825 MHz & 896–902 MHz

Tx : 851–870 MHz & 935–941 MHz

1-8 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Specifications

Receiver

Selectivity* 25 kHz / 12.5 kHz 80 dB / 75 dB 85 dB / 75 dB

Sensitivity‡ (12 dB Sinad) 0.3 uV 0.3 uV

Sensitivity‡** (5% BER) 0.3 uV 0.3 uV

Sensitivity with External Peripherals

(Antenna Relay and/or Preselector)

0.35 uV 0.35 uV

Intermodulation Rejection 25 kHz / 12.5 kHz 85 dB 85 dB

Spurious Rejection 85 dB (without External

Preselector)

90 dB (without External

Preselector)

Spurious and Image Response Rejection

with Narrow Preselector (Optional)

90 dB Option not offered

Audio Distortion <3% <3%

FM Hum and Noise 25 kHz / 12.5 kHz 50 dB / 45 dB 50 dB / 45 dB

FCC Identifier ABZ89FR4824 (UHF R1) or

ABZ89FR4826 (UHF R2)

ABZ89FR5818 (806–902 MHz)

Transmitter

Rated Output Power (Continuous Duty) 8–100 W 8–100 W

Intermodulation Attenuation 55 dB 55 dB

Adjacent Channel Power 25 kHz / 12.5 kHz 75 dB / 60 dB 75 dB / 60 dB

Wideband Noise (1 MHz) -152 dBc/Hz -152 dBc/Hz

RSD 25 kHz / 12.5 kHz 5 kHz / 2.5 kHz 5 kHz / 2.5 kHz

Spurious Harmonics and Emissions -90 dBc -90 dBc (800 MHz),

-86 dBc (900 MHz)

Audio Distortion <3% <3%

FM Hum and Noise 25 kHz / 12.5 kHz 50 dB / 45 dB 50 dB / 45 dB

FCC Identifier ABZ89FC4823 (403–470 MHz)

ABZ89FC4825 (470–524 MHz)

ABZ89FC5817 (851–870 MHz,

896–941 MHz)

Industry Canada

• IC certification / registration number

• IC model number

• Tx / Rx Frequency range

109AB-T3000

T3000-UHF R1

406.1–430 MHz, 450–470 MHz

109AB-5817

T3000-8/900

Rx : 806–824 MHz & 896–901 MHz

Tx : 851–869 MHz & 935–940 MHz

Table 1-4 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Specifications (Continued)

Parameter

Specifications

UHF 800/900 MHz

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Theory of Operation 1-9

All specifications noted above are in accordance to TIA603D unless otherwise noted as below.

1.4 Theory of Operation

The MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater (BR) provides the radio frequency (RF) link between the base

station/repeater and the subscriber radios. The base station/repeater acquires inbound signals via its

external receive (Rx) antenna and then amplifies, filters and demodulates the signals into data or

voice packets. From that point, the data is either forwarded to the base station/repeater transmitter to

be re-modulated and amplified for delivery to subscriber radios, and/or the data is delivered via a

wired interface for distribution to networked base station/repeaters, consoles, or other networked

infrastructure.

The MTR3000 base station/repeater consists of a Receiver module, Exciter module, Station Control

Module (SCM), Power Amplifier (PA) and Power Supply (PS). These modules are also known as

field replaceable units (FRU).

• The Receiver Module is a dual heterodyne Receiver which receives the RF signal from the

subscriber’s transmitter. It then converts the resulting final intermediate frequency (IF) from

an analog signal to that of a digital word in IQ signal format. Finally, the Receiver delivers the

IQ signal, via the SSI bus, to the SCM for demodulation. Additionally, the Receiver also

provides for its own metering and diagnostics via software, as well as a self-contained

calibration (no field tuning is needed for the Receiver Module).

• The Exciter Module converts a two-port base band data signal, sent over the SSI bus from

the SCM, to an analog signal representation. The analog signal is then modulated with a low

power RF transmitter carrier that is generated by the Exciter. The low power modulated RF

carrier is then amplified and delivered to the PA at approximately +14 dBm for further

amplification. The Exciter and PA constitute the transmitter of the MTR3000 Base Station/

Repeater. Additionally, the Exciter also provides its own metering and diagnostics via

software, as well as a self-contained calibration (no field tuning is needed for the Exciter

Module).

• The heart of the SCM Module is the two Texas Instruments OMAP1710 processors. Each

OMAP processor contains an ARM Host and a C55 DSP processor. One of these OMAP

processor is dedicated to Receiver DSP operations, while the other OMAP provides for all

other operations, including the transmitter functions.

In general, the SCM controls the entire coordination of the base station/repeater functions.

Specifically, the SCM provides for the following functionalities:

- Contains and runs the preloaded base station/repeater software

- Manages inbound and outbound RF and Audio traffic

- Provides external speaker and microphone ports

- Provides an on-board USB port for local configuring, alignment and diagnostics via the

following applications:

Note (*) Per TIA603

(**) Per TIA102 Method

(‡) Without Rx peripherals attached

Note To determine the proper amount of air conditioning at a radio site, refer to the “Power

Dissipation” and “BTU Energy” specifications in the MTR3000 Product Planner located on

Motorola on line (MOL), http://www.motorola.com/businessonline

The latest MTR3000 Product Planner can be located by the following path:

MOL > Resource Centre > Product Information > Systems > MOTOTRBO > MTR3000

Product Planner

1-10 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Theory of Operation

- Customer Programming Software (CPS)

- Tuner application

- Repeater Diagnostic and Control (RDAC) software

- Online Help

- Provides an Ethernet port for IP site connectivity and remote RDAC

- Provides GPIO connectivity for third party controller interfaces

- Provides for analog base station/repeater audio connectivity

- Data and Control to the Receiver via the SPI and SSI respectively

- Data and Control to the Exciter via the SPI and SSI respectively

- Control of the PA’s set power via the SPI

- Generates the internal station reference

- Provides control of the front panel status indicators.

• The PA Module amplifies the low level modulated RF signal from the Exciter module. It then

delivers the amplified signal to the transmitter antenna port at a power level within the rated

power band of the base station/repeater, for transmission to the subscriber radios. In addition

to its primary task of amplification, the PA provides the following hardware functions for the

base station/repeater.

- Harmonic attenuation

- Inter-modulation attenuation (IMA) suppression

- VSWR detection

- RF power control (primary means)

- Self contained cooling fan and control circuit

- Meters for diagnostics

- Power rollback for temperature, VSWR, and voltage

- Self-Contained calibration (no field alignment is needed for the PA Module).

• The PS Module provides DC power to the Receiver, Exciter, SCM and PA Module via one or

more of the three DC output taps; 28.6 VDC, 14.2 VDC, and 5.1 VDC. It can also be used to

provide auxiliary power (14 VDC) to a number of third party controllers. Additionally, it can

operate in three different input modes:

- AC Input Only

- DC Input Only

- AC with Battery Revert.

In addition to providing power to the noted FRU and controllers, the PS also provides the

following:

- AC Failure detect signaling to the SCM

- Output over-current protection for all three outputs

- Self contained cooling fan and control circuit (thermal shut down if the environmental

temperatures exceed the cooling capacity provided by the fan).

• Further details can be found in the individual “Theory of Operation” sections of the respective

FRU chapters.

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Model Chart 1-11

1.5 Model Chart

1. The Factory ID Model numbers are:

The sales model includes the following items which are common to all stations:

2. A System Software Option can be selected for the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater and

MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade as follows:

Table 1-5 Factory ID Model Numbers

Models Factory ID

Model No.

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater T3000

MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade T2003

Table 1-6 Sales Model

T3000 T2003

Station Control Module (SCM) Station Control Module (SCM)

Front bezel Front bezel

Power Supply (PS) Module Exciter Module

Backplane Interface Board Receiver Module

Backplane Interface Board hardware –

Station chassis hardware –

Cables –

Exciter Module –

Receiver Module –

Power Amplifier (PA) Module –

Table 1-7 System Software Options

System Type Factory ID Model No.

Upgrade your current station software to

the latest version. (Available on MOL)

Not Applicable

MTR3000 Capacity Plus SW Upgrade HKLN4439_ (NAG)

HKLN4475_ (LACR)

HKVN4045_ (EMEA)

82012490001 (APAC)

HKVN4045_ (AU)

MTR3000 IP Site Connect HKLN4476_ (LACR)

82012491001 (APAC)

MTR3000 Dynamic Mixed Mode HKVN4044_ (NAG)

82012489001 (APAC)

1-12 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting

3. For a list of further ordering configurations and options for MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater,

please refer to the Motorola on line (MOL) website, http://www.motorola.com/businessonline

The latest pricing information and option descriptions can be located by the following path:

MOL> Resource Center> Print on Demand> Price Book> Pricing> Conventional Trunking

Price book Components > MTR3000

4. For a list of further ordering configurations and options for MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital

Upgrade, please refer to the Motorola on line (MOL) website,

http://www.motorola.com/businessonline

The latest pricing information and option descriptions can be located by the following path:

MOL> Resource Center> Print on Demand> Price Book> Pricing> Conventional Trunking

Price book Components > MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Upgrade

1.6 Basic Troubleshooting

Diagnostic tests are available for the SCM, Exciter, PA, and Receiver Modules. If a problem occurs

during station operation, it is logged as an alarm that is read with the Repeater Diagnostic and

Control application (RDAC). Refer to Figure 1-4 for the RDAC diagnostic screen.

Figure 1-4 RDAC Diagnostic Screen

Note 1. To upgrade the software, select "Device update" followed by the correct version. Click

"OK" and the software will then be upgraded.

2. To activate the software feature, refer to the “Purchasing Radio Features” section in the

Online Help of the Customer Programming Software (CPS).

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting 1-13

The station operator will then evaluate the problem locally or remotely, as the station will maintain an

Alarm Log with the name of the alarm that has failed since the last power up. Via the RDAC

application’s Alarm Log, the alarm messages will aid in identifying the FRU that failed along with the

fault condition.

After booting up the base station/repeater, the 6 LEDs (Power/Status, Tx Slot 1, Tx Slot 2, Rx Slot 1,

Rx Slot 2 and the Mode LEDs) will flash in unison.

The general status and condition of the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater can be obtained by

observing the eight LED indicators on the front panel. Table 1-8 shows the LED symbols and their

meaning, while Table 1-9 identifies the information conveyed via the LED indicators. Table 1-10

shows the alarm diagnosis table and probable diagnosis to aid in identifying the fault.

Table 1-8 Front Panel LED indicators

LED Definition

Status

Tx Slot 1 (for label number 1)

Tx Slot 2 (for label number 2)

Rx Slot 1 (for label number 1)

Rx Slot 2 (for label number 2)

Mode

Ethernet Link

Reference

1-14 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting

Table 1-9 MTR3000 Software and Hardware Controlled LEDs

LED Function Name LED Color LED State Status Indication

Power/Status, Tx Slot 1,

Tx Slot 2, Rx Slot 1, Rx

Slot 2

Mode

Amber Flashing Station booting up

Blue

Power/Status Off Off Station Off

Green Flashing Station Operating Normally, with DC power

Solid Station Operating Normally, with AC power

Red Flashing Station Operational – Minor Alarm

Solid Station Not Operational – Major Alarm

Amber Flashing Station in Service Mode

Solid Station is Disabled (Dekeyed)

Tx Slot 1

Tx Slot 2

Off Off Transmitter is not transmitting

Green Solid Transmitter is transmitting

Flashing Transmitter is transmitting, but at reduced power

Rx Slot 1

Rx Slot 2

Off Off Receiver qualifier has not been met

Green Solid Receiver qualifier has been met

Mode Off Off Analog Mode (FM)

Blue Solid Digital Mode (2 Slot TDMA, 4FSK)

Blue Flashing DMM feature is active, but no calls are currently

being processed.

Ethernet Link Off Off No Ethernet connection

Green Solid Linked

Flashing Network traffic

Reference Off Off No external reference is present

Green Solid Training process is completed, and the

calibration data has been written to the

EEPROM, or an external reference is present

after training (which the base station/repeater

has phase locked to).

Amber Solid Locked to external reference, and training is in

progress

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting 1-15

Note The RDAC application will be needed when the Status LED is red (solid or flashing). This

status indicates a minor or major alarm. The RDAC application is used to identify the

specific alarm and probable diagnosis to aid in identifying the FRU at fault.

If the Reference LED remains amber for more than ten minutes during the alignment, then

verify the integrity of the source used to train the base station/repeater’s internal reference.

If the integrity of the source is verified to be good, then the SCM will need to be replaced.

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

Receiver Rx Alarm Major Yes Yes The Receiver

PLL has lost

lock.

Local Dealer:

Replace the Receiver

FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Repair or replace the

Receiver FRU

Receiver

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 1

Minor No Yes The Receiver

EEPROM has

incurred non-

recoverable

corruption in a

semi-critical

memory

location.

Local Dealer:

Replace the Receiver

FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Recalibrate the Receiver

FRU

Receiver

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 2

Minor No Yes The Receiver

EEPROM has

incurred a

recoverable

corruption in

critical memory

location or non-

recoverable

corruption in a

non-critical area

of memory.

No action needed. This is

informational only.

Receiver

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 3

Major No Yes The Receiver

EEPROM has

incurred non-

recoverable

corruption in a

critical memory

location.

Local Dealer:

Replace the Receiver

FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Recalibrate the Receiver

FRU

1-16 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting

Transmitter Tx Alarm Major Yes Yes The Exciter PLL

has lost lock.

Local Dealer:

Replace the Exciter FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Repair/recalibrate or

replace the Exciter FRU

Fan Alarm Minor Yes Yes The PA fan has

failed.

Local Dealer:

Replace the PA fan

Motorola Repair Depot:

Replace the PA fan

Note: The PA and PS fans

should be replaced in

pairs.

Tx Power

Minor Alarm

Minor Yes No The PA output

power is

between 2 dB to

3 dB below the

set output power,

or the output

power is more

than 3 dB below

the set output

power with one

or more of the

following alarms

already

detected: Fan

Alarm, Temp

Alarm, PA

Voltage Minor

Alarm, PA

Voltage Major

Alarm, VSWR

Minor Alarm or

VSWR Major

Alarm.

When this alarm is

detected, check the

Diagnostic Repeater Log

to determine which failure

– “Tx Power Minor Alarm

(-2 dB)” or “Tx Power

Minor Alarm (-3 dB)” – has

occurred.

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting 1-17

Transmitter Tx Power

Major Alarm

Major Yes No The PA output

power is more

than 3 dB below

the set output

power.

Local Dealer:

Remedy 1: Verify that the “

Exciter to PA” cable is

properly installed

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

replace the PA FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Remedy 1: Verify that the

“Exciter to PA” cable is

properly installed

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

repair/recalibrate or

replace the PA FRU

Tx Power

Minor Alarm

(-2 dB)

Minor No Yes

Counterpart

to “Tx Power

Minor Alarm”

The PA output

power is

between 2 dB to

3 dB below the

set output power

of the station.

Local Dealer:

Replace the PA FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Repair/recalibrate or

replace the PA FRU

Tx Power

Minor Alarm

(-3 dB)

Minor No Yes

Counterpart

to “Tx Power

Minor Alarm”

The PA output

power is more

than 3 dB below

the set output

power of the

station, but at

least one of the

following “

primary” alarms

is also present:

Fan Alarm, Temp

Alarm, PA

Voltage Minor

Alarm, PA

Voltage Major

Alarm, VSWR

Minor Alarm or

VSWR Major

Alarm.

Local Dealer:

Attend to the primary

alarms (see appropriate

remedies at the relevant

alarm sections)

Motorola Repair Depot:

Attend to the primary

alarms (see appropriate

remedies at the relevant

alarm sections)

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

1-18 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting

Transmitter Tx Power

Major Alarm

(-3 dB)

Major No Yes

Counterpart

to “Tx Power

Major Alarm”

The PA output

power is more

than 3 dB below

the set output

power.

Motorola Repair Depot:

Remedy 1: Verify that the

“Exciter to PA” cable is

properly installed.

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

repair/recalibrate or

replace the PA FRU

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 1

Minor No Yes The PA

EEPROM has

incurred non-

recoverable

corruption in a

semi-critical

memory

location.

Note : Alarm is

not applicable to

the MTR2000

MOTOTRBO

Digital Upgrade,

as the MTR2000

Power Amplifier

(PA) does not

have an

EEPROM

Local Dealer:

Replace the PA FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Recalibrate the PA FRU

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 2

Minor No Yes The PA

EEPROM has

incurred

recoverable

corruption in a

critical memory

location or non-

recoverable

corruption in a

non-critical area

of memory.

Note : Alarm is

not applicable to

the MTR2000

MOTOTRBO

Digital Upgrade,

as the MTR2000

Power Amplifier

(PA) does not

have an

EEPROM

No action needed. This is

informational only.

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting 1-19

Transmitter PA

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 3

Major No Yes The PA

EEPROM has

incurred non-

recoverable

corruption in a

critical memory

location.

Note : Alarm is

not applicable to

the MTR2000

MOTOTRBO

Digital Upgrade,

as the MTR2000

Power Amplifier

(PA) does not

have an

EEPROM

Local Dealer:

Replace the PA FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Recalibrate the PA FRU

Exciter

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 1

Minor No Yes The Exciter

EEPROM has

incurred non-

recoverable

corruption in a

semi-critical

memory

location.

Local Dealer:

Replace the Exciter FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Recalibrate the Exciter

FRU

Exciter

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 2

Minor No Yes The Exciter

EEPROM has

incurred

recoverable

corruption in a

critical memory

location or non-

recoverable

corruption in a

non-critical area

of memory.

No action needed. This is

informational only.

Exciter

EEPROM

Corruption

Type 3

Major No Yes The Exciter

EEPROM has

incurred non-

recoverable

corruption in a

critical memory

location.

Local Dealer:

Replace the Exciter FRU

Motorola Repair Depot:

Recalibrate the Exciter

FRU

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

1-20 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting

Transmitter Interopera-

bility

Between

Exciter and

Major No Yes The PA and

Exciter do not

have a

compatible

frequency range

with each other.

Local Dealer:

Remedy 1: Verify that the

correct PA or Exciter is

installed in the station.

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

verify that the backplane

interface board and PS

cables to the PA are

correctly installed.

Remedy 3: If Remedy 1 or

Remedy 2 does not solve

this issue, replace the

Exciter or PA FRU.

Motorola Repair Depot:

Remedy 1: Verify that the

correct PA or Exciter is

installed in the station.

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

verify that the backplane

interface board and PS

cables to the PA are

correctly installed.

Remedy 3: If Remedy 1 or

Remedy 2 does not solve

this issue, repair/

recalibrate or replace the

Exciter or PA FRU.

Reference

Incompatibility

Major No Yes A standard

stability

reference

(1.5 ppm) SCM

has been

installed into a

800/900 MHz

base station/

repeater.

Note: This alarm

is only applicable

to 800/900 MHz

base station/

repeater.

Local Dealer:

Replace the SCM FRU

with a version (DLN6718)

that provides a high

stability reference

(0.1 ppm).

Motorola Repair Depot:

Replace the SCM FRU

with a version (DLN6718)

that provides a high

stability reference

(0.1 ppm).

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting 1-21

Power System AC Power

Alarm

Minor Yes Yes The station is not

at fault. The AC

power source

has been

interrupted and

the station is

operating on DC

power.

Local Dealer:

The alarm will clear when

the AC power source is

brought back on line.

Note: This alarm will be

masked if the station is set

for “DC Operation Only” in

the “General Settings” of

the CPS.

Power System PA Voltage

Minor Alarm

Minor Yes No The station is not

at fault. This

alarm occurs

when the station

is operating from

a DC source with

an output

voltage that

cannot sustain

the maximum

rated output

power from the

PA.

Local Dealer:

When this alarm is

detected, check the

Diagnostic Repeater Log

to determine whether the

voltage is at an

intermediate level “PA

Voltage alarm

(Intermediate)” or it is too

high “PA Voltage alarm

(High)”.

PA Voltage

Major Alarm

Major Yes No The station is not

at fault. This

alarm occurs

when the station

is operating from

a DC source that

has an output

voltage which is

too low to

sustain any level

of output power

from the PA.

Local Dealer:

The site batteries are near

depletion and station shut

down is imminent. Service

personnel should be

dispatched to the site to

restore AC power or

provide alternate power.

This alarm will clear when

either the AC is restored

or the DC voltage levels

are restored to the working

limits required by the

station.

PA Voltage

Alarm (High)

Minor No Yes

Counterpart

to “PA

Voltage

Minor Alarm”

The station is not

at fault. This

alarm occurs

when the station

is operating from

a DC source with

an output

voltage that is

too high to

sustain the

maximum rated

output power

from the PA.

Local Dealer:

Proper operation of the

battery charger / rectifier

should be verified, or

verify that the battery plant

is designed to the

specified voltage

operating limits of the

station. This alarm will

clear when either the AC

is restored or the DC

voltage levels are restored

to the working limits

required by the station.

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

1-22 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting

Power System PA

Voltage

Alarm (Inter-

mediate)

Minor No Yes

Counterpart

to “PA

Voltage

Minor Alarm”

The station is not

at fault. This

alarm occurs

when the station

is operating from

a DC source with

an intermediate

output voltage

level that can not

sustain the

maximum rated

output power

from the PA.

Local Dealer:

The site batteries are

within their normal

discharge curve. This

alarm will clear when AC

power is restored.

PA Voltage

Alarm (low)

Major No Yes

Counterpart

to “PA

Voltage

Major Alarm”

The station is not

at fault. This

alarm occurs

when the station

is operating from

a DC source that

has an output

voltage which is

too low to

sustain any level

of output power

from the PA.

Local Dealer:

The site batteries are near

depletion and station shut

down is imminent. Service

personnel should be

dispatched to the site to

restore AC power or

provide alternate power.

This alarm will clear when

either the AC is restored

or the DC voltage levels

are restored to the working

limits required by the

station.

Codeplug

Configuration

Incorrect

Carrier

Frequency

Major No Yes At least one

personality

(analog or digital

channel) exists

in the codeplug

which has a

frequency

outside of the

supported

electronic

bandwidth of the

Receiver,

Exciter, or PA.

Local Dealer:

Correct the invalid

personality with the CPS

application.

Note: Upon reading the

codeplug, CPS will

automatically set the

invalid personality to a

default value that falls

within the valid limits of the

hardware. The user must

then set the defaulted

personality to the required

setting.

Incorrect

Codeplug for

MTR2000

Major No Yes The MTR3000

codeplug

contains an

unsupported

MTR2000 PA.

Local Dealer:

Correct the invalid

MTR2000 sticker code

with the Tuner application.

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting 1-23

Environmental --

External to

Station

Temp Alarm Minor Yes Yes The station has

exceeded the

temperature limit

that will allow

maximum rated

output power

from the PA

Local Dealer:

Remedy 1: If the “Fan

Alarm” is present, this can

cause the “Temp Alarm” to

be issued as a secondary

alarm. If applicable,

correct the “Fan Alarm”

first, see “Fan Alarm”.

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

verify that there is not a

problem with the site

temperature itself. The

station will clear the

“Temp Alarm” and allow

maximum rated output

power when the

temperature of the site is

lowered.

Remedy 3: If Remedy 1

and Remedy 2 does not

solve this issue, verify that

the rack and cabinet

installations of the station

are in accordance with the

product planner

instructions.

Remedy 4: If Remedy 1,

Remedy 2 and Remedy 3

does not solve this issue,

replace the PA FRU.

Environmental --

External to

Station

Temp Alarm Minor Yes Yes The station has

exceeded the

temperature limit

that will allow

maximum rated

output power

from the PA

Motorola Repair Depot:

Remedy 1: If the “Fan

Alarm” is present, this can

cause the “Temp Alarm” to

be issued as a secondary

alarm. If applicable,

correct the “Fan Alarm”

first, see “Fan Alarm”.

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

repair/replace/recalibrate

the PA FRU.

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

1-24 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater: Basic Troubleshooting

Environmental --

External to

Station

VSWR

Minor Alarm

Minor Yes Yes The Voltage

Standing Wave

Ratio (VSWR),

of the equipment

the station is

coupled to, is

between a 3:1 to

5:1. If needed,

the station will

roll back power

in order to

protect the PA.

Local Dealer:

Remedy 1: Verify the

operational load coupled

to the station is better than

a 2:1 VSWR (minimally).

The load should be better

than a 1.5:1.

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

replace the PA FRU.

Motorola Repair Depot:

Replace/repair/recalibrate

the PA FRU.

VSWR

Major Alarm

Major Yes Yes The Voltage

Standing Wave

Ratio (VSWR),

of the equipment

the station is

coupled to, is

greater than a

5:1. The station

disables itself

since very little

power, if any, is

being delivered

to the transmitter

antenna.

Local Dealer:

Remedy 1: Verify the

operational load coupled

to the station is better than

a 2:1 VSWR (minimally).

The load should be better

than a 1.5:1.

Remedy 2: If Remedy 1

does not solve this issue,

replace the PA FRU.

Motorola Repair Depot:

Replace/repair/recalibrate

the PA FRU.

Table 1-10 MTR3000 Alarm Diagnosis Table (Continued)

Sub-system Alarm

Name

Alarm

Class

Diag.

View

Diag.

Repeater

Log

Diagnosis Probable Remedy

Chapter 2 MTR3000 Receiver Module

2.1 Description

The Receiver Module is described in this section. A general description, identification of inputs and

outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are provided. The information

provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module, allowing

maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level.

2.1.1 General Description

The Receiver Module consists of a Receiver RF board in a clamshell housing assembly. It provides

the Receiver functionality for the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater and performs highly-selective

bandpass filtering and dual down-conversion of the desired RF signal. A custom Receiver IC then

performs an analog-to-digital conversion of the desired received signal and outputs a differential data

signal to the Station Control Module (SCM).

2.1.1.1 Overview of Circuitry

The Receiver Module contains the following circuitry:

• Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry – Consists a phase-locked loop and Voltage-Controlled

Oscillator (VCO), generates the first LO injection signal

• Varactor-tuned Preselector Filter / Fixed Preselector Filter (800/900 MHz) – Provides

bandpass filtering of the station Receiver RF input

• Receiver Front End Circuitry – Performs filtering, amplification, and the first down conversion

of the Receiver RF signal

• Receiver-specific IC Circuitry – Consists a receiver-specific IC which performs the second

down conversion, filtering, amplification, and analog-to-digital conversion of the receive

signal

• Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) Converter Circuitry – Converts analog Receiver status

signals to digital format for transfer, upon request, to the SCM

• Local Power Supply Regulation – Accepts +8 V, +10 V and +14.2 V inputs and outputs

+2.775 V, +3.3 V, +5 V, +10 V, and +14.2 V operating voltages

2-2 MTR3000 Receiver Module: Description

2.1.1.2 Input and Output Connections

Figure 2-1 shows the Receiver module input and output external connections.

Receive RF Input

Connector

Receiver I/O Connector – To SCM

Figure 2-1 UHF Receiver Module Input/Output

MTR3000 Receiver Module: Specifications 2-3

2.2 Specifications

Table 2-1 shows the specifications of the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater’s Receiver Module.

2.3 Functional Theory of Operation

The base station/repeater’s Receiver (Rx) is one Receiver on a single four-layer board. Refer to

Figure 2-2 for the block diagram of the Receiver module for UHF band and Figure 2-3 for 800/900

MHz band.

2.3.1 Functional Overview

2.3.1.1 Receiver Front End Circuitry

The RF signal enters the Receiver through a BNC-type RF connector, located on the bottom side of

the Receiver. The signal is then low-pass filtered, and the 1/2 IF and image frequency are filtered

through the preselector filter. This signal is then amplified using a low-noise amplifier (LNA), and

then further filtered to remove the image signal.

Table 2-1 Specifications of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater’s Receiver

Parameter

Specification

UHF 800/900 MHz

Frequency Ranges 403–470 MHz (UHF R1) or

450–524 MHz (UHF R2)

806–825 MHz & 896–902 MHz

Electronic Bandwidth Full Bandwidth (UHF R1 and R2) Full Bandwidth

Analog Sensitivity 12 dB SINAD, at

Rx BNC connector

0.257 uV (-118.8 dBm) 0.291 uV (-117.7 dBm)

Intermodulation Rejection 85 dB 85 dB

Adjacent Channel Rejection* 75 dB at 12 kHz, 80 dB at 25 kHz 75 dB at 12.5 kHz, 85 dB at 25 kHz

Spurious and Image Response Rejection 85 dB 90 dB

Intermediate Frequencies 1st : 73.35 MHz

2nd : 2.25 MHz

1st : 73.35 MHz

2nd : 2.25 MHz

RF Impedance 50 Ω50 Ω

Current Draw (Maximum) 0.05A from 14.2 VDC supply

0.5A from 10 VDC supply

0.13A from 8 VDC supply

0.05A from 14.2 VDC supply

0.5A from 10 VDC supply

0.13A from 8 VDC supply

Note (*) Per TIA 603

2-4 MTR3000 Receiver Module: Functional Theory of Operation

2.3.1.2 Receiver Back End Circuitry

The signal after the image filter is then mixed down to the first IF, via a high performance (high IIP3)

mixer, driven by the low-phase noise, voltage-controlled Colpitts oscillator (VCO). The mixed-down

signal then passes through a 3-pole, crystal IF bandpass filter and an IF amplifier. The amplifier

output signal passes through another 3-pole crystal bandpass filter, and the resultant signal passes

through a digital step attenuator. The desired signal is then applied to the RF input of the backend

Receiver-specific IC.

2.3.1.3 Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)

The Receiver Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) generates a sinusoidal output signal that ranges

from 476.35 MHz to 543.35 MHz (UHF R1), 523.35 MHz to 597.35 MHz (UHF R2), 732.65 MHz to

751.65 MHz (800 MHz) and 969.35 MHz to 975.35 MHz (900 MHz). Either UHF R1, UHF R2, 800

MHz or 900 MHz can be used at a time. The Receive Voltage-Controlled Oscillator (RXVCO) line-up

consists of four sub-circuits: a Voltage-Controlled Oscillator (VCO), an attenuator, a buffer-amplifier,

and a low pass filter (LPF).

The active device is from oscillator topology, utilizing a high-Q resonator, and four anti-parallel-

configured, hyper-abrupt, tuning varactors.

The attenuator provides a broadband RF load for the VCO. The buffer-amplifier provides power-

leveling and isolation. The LPF provides VCO harmonic attenuation.

2.3.1.4 Synthesizer Circuitry

The Receiver synthesizer is a subcircuit within the receiver-specific IC, which when connected with a

loop filter, VCO, buffer amplifier, lowpass filter, driver amplifier, unequal splitter, and feedback

attenuator forms a phase-locked loop. The frequency and phase of the VCO is locked to a highly-

stable external Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) reference (16.8 MHz). This IC

contains the following integrated Phase locked loop (PLL) components: prescaler, fractional-N

divider, reference divider, phase detector, and charge-pump (for the external loop-filter). The

reference divider frequency is selected to be either 8.4 MHz, 5.6 MHz or 16.8 MHz (800/900 MHz

band).

2.3.1.5 Backend Receiver-specific IC Circuitry

The backend Receiver-specific IC provides additional amplification, filtering, and a second down-

conversion. The second IF signal is converted to a digital signal, and output via either a differential or

single-ended driver to the digital signal processor (DSP) in the SCM.

2.3.1.6 Memory Circuitry

The memory circuitry consists of an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

(EEPROM), located in the Receiver. The SCM performs memory read and write operations via the

SPI bus. The Rx Front-End Filter tuning calibration is stored in the EEPROM. Therefore, no field

tuning is ever required for the Receiver.

2.3.1.7 Analog to Digital (ADC) Converter Metering Circuitry

Analog signals from points throughout the Receiver are applied to the ADC converter. These analog

signals are converted to digital signals and then sent to the SCM, via the Serial Peripheral Interface

(SPI) lines, upon request of the SCM.

MTR3000 Receiver Module: Functional Theory of Operation 2-5

2.3.2 Data Communications

2.3.2.1 Communications with Station Control Module

Data communications between the Receiver and the Station Control Module microprocessor (μP) is

performed via a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus. This bus allows the SCM μP to send data to

the synthesizer PLL IC (to select frequency) and to read the ADC Converter IC.

2.3.2.2 ADC Converter Circuitry

Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the Receiver board are fed to an

ADC converter, which converts them to a digital signal and, upon request by the Station Control

Module, outputs the signal to the Station Control Module via the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)

bus.

Notes

2-6 MTR3000 Receiver Module: Functional Theory of Operation

MTR3000 Receiver Module 2-7

Figure 2-2 UHF Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram

LPF

RF_RX_IN

Custom

SYNTH IC

VCO Buffer

Amplifier

16.8 MHz REF

Buffer

PREIN

Driver Final

Metering IC

RX VCO1

12V

Super

Filter

RX_LO_IN

16.8 MHz REF

RX_IF

Custom BE

3.3V

18 MHz REF

IF Amp

IOUTL

IOUTC

12V

16.8MHz

Reference

Low Pass

Filter

LNA Image Filter

VSL_DC

PI PAD

Attenuator

VSL_DC

PI PAD

Attenuator

AMP

LOOP

FILTER

EEPROM

LPF

VCO_EN

Aux DAC

OUT

RX VCO2

OUT

RX_ATTEN

CPLD

RX_Standby

Vcc_CP

Iout

Trident

Reset

Trident Reset

Custom BE IC SPI

Custom BE IC SSI

12V

10V

3.3V

2.775V

Backplane Connector

14.2V

10V

16.8MHz Ref

Switched Voltage

Reg.

Atten

TBPF

EEPROM SPI

CPLD SPI

Synth SPI

14.2V

RFIF

Unequal

Splitter

Voltage Controlled Oscillator

(VCO)

Receiver Front End Circuitry

Receiver Back End Circuitry

Synthesizer Circuitry

Custom Back End

Receiver IC Circuitry

Memory Circuitry

ADC Metering Circuitry

Voltage Reg.

1st IF XTAL2

ndIF XTAL

RX BE

2nd LO +

Loop Filter

System

Clock Loop

Filter

System

Clock Tank

Circuit

Metering, EEPROM,Synth SPI Abacus_Clock

Abacus 2nd LO

Inj_Final

VCO_SLV

VCO_LD

2-8

Figure 2-3 800/900 MHz Receiver Module Functional Block Diagram

LPF

RF_RX_IN

Custom

SYNTH IC

16.8 MHz REF

Buffer

PREIN

Driver Final

Metering ICAbacus_Clock

Abacus 2nd LO

Inj_Final

RX_LO_IN

16.8 MHz REF

RX_IF

Custom BE

3.3V

18 MHz REF

IF Amp

RX BE

2nd LO +

Loop Filter

IOUTL

System

Clock Loop

Filter

System

Clock Tank

Circuit

IOUTC

16.8MHz

Reference

VCO_SLV

VCO_LD

LOOP

FILTER

EEPROM

LPF

VCO_EN

Aux DAC

RX_ATTEN

CPLD

RX_Standby

Vcc_CP

Iout

Trident

Reset

Trident Reset

1st IF XTAL2

ndIF XTAL

Custom BE IC SPI

12V

10V

3.3V

2.775V

Backplane Connector

14.2V

10V

16.8MHz Ref

Switched Voltage

Reg.

Image FilterFixed BPF

EEPROM SPI

CPLD SPI

Synth SPI

Metering, EEPROM,Synth SPI

14.2V

RFIF

Unequal

Splitter

Voltage Controlled Oscillator

(VCO)

Receiver Front End Circuitry

Receiver Back End Circuitry

Synthesizer Circuitry

Custom Back End

Receiver IC Circuitry

Memory Circuitry

ADC Metering Circuitry

Voltage Reg.

VCO Buffer

Amplifier 800

RX VCO1

12V

Super

filter

12V

Low Pass

Filter

VSL_DC

PI PAD

Attenuator

VSL_DC

PI PAD

Attenuator

10V_RX

ENOUT

RX VCO2

OUT

VCO Buffer

Amplifier 900

VCO RF

Switch

10V_RX

Atten

LNA

Custom BE IC SSI

MTR3000 Receiver Module: Basic Troubleshooting 2-9

2.4 Basic Troubleshooting

2.4.1 Replacement Procedure

The RDAC application is used as a general guide for basic troubleshooting. Use this application to

check the Receive (Rx) lock alarm, as the initial step to identifying faults to the Receiver module.

For procedure to replace the Receiver module, refer to Section 14.7.2.6 on page 14-12.

Notes

2-10 MTR3000 Receiver Module: Basic Troubleshooting

Chapter 3 MTR3000 Exciter Module

3.1 Description

The Exciter Module is described in this section. A general description, identification of inputs and

outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are provided. The information

provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module, allowing

maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level.

3.1.1 General Description

The Exciter Module (in conjunction with the Power Amplifier Module) provides the transmitter

functions for the station. Contained within a metal clamshell housing, the Exciter board generates a

low-level modulated Radio Frequency (RF) signal which is input to the Power Amplifier module for

further amplification and output to the transmit antenna. The Exciter Modules interfaces directly with

the Station Control Module (SCM), which provides control signals and monitoring, and routes

transmit data to the Exciter.

The RF carrier is generated by a frequency synthesizer consisting of synthesizer circuitry and

Voltage-Controlled Oscillator (VCO) circuitry. Exciter module control signals, monitoring, and audio

processing are handled by the Station Control Module (SCM).

3.1.1.1 Overview of Circuitry

The Exciter board contains the following circuitry:

• Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry – Consists of a phase-locked loop and Voltage-Controlled

Oscillator (VCO), generates a modulated RF signal at the transmitter carrier frequency

• RF Isolation Switch – Allows the SCM to turn on/off the Exciter RF output signal to the Power

Amplifier module

• Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) Converter Circuitry – Converts the analog Exciter status

signals to the digital format for transfer, upon request, to the SCM

• Local Power Supply Regulation/Filtering – Accepts +8 V, +10 V and +14.2 V inputs and

provides +5 V, +10 V, and +12 V operating voltages

• Low Level Amplifiers – Amplify and buffer the modulated RF signal from the VCO for delivery

to the power amplifier module

3-2 MTR3000 Exciter Module: Description

3.1.1.2 Input and Output Connections

Figure 3-1 shows the Exciter module input and output external connections.

Exciter I/O Connector Q – To S C M

RF Output to Power

Amplifier Module

Figure 3-1 UHF Exciter Module Input/Output

MTR3000 Exciter Module: Specifications 3-3

3.2 Specifications

Table 3-1 shows the specifications of the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater’s Exciter Module.

3.3 Functional Theory of Operation

The following theory of operation describes the operation of the Exciter circuitry at a functional level.

Refer to Figure 3-2 for the block diagram of the Exciter module.

3.3.1 Functional Overview

3.3.1.1 Synthesizer and VCO Circuitry

3.3.1.1.1 Phase-Locked Loop

The phase-locked loop (PLL) IC receives frequency selection data from the SCM microprocessor

(via the SPI bus). Once programmed, the PLL IC compares a 8.4 MHz (UHF) or

16.8 MHz (800/900 MHz) reference signal (from the SCM) with a divided-down feedback sample of

the VCO output. Depending on whether the feedback signal is higher or lower in frequency than the

8.4 MHz reference, up/down correction pulses are generated. (The width of these correction pulses

depends on the quantitative difference between the 8.4 MHz reference and the VCO feedback.)

The up/down pulses from the PLL IC are fed to a charge pump which outputs a DC voltage

proportional to the pulse widths. This DC voltage is then low-pass filtered and fed to the VCO as the

control voltage.

Table 3-1 Specifications of Exciter Module

Parameter

Specification

UHF 800/900 MHz

Frequency Ranges 403–470 MHz (UHF R1) or

450–524 MHz (UHF R2)

851–870 MHz & 935–941 MHz

Electronic Bandwidth Full Bandwidth (UHF R1 and R2) Full Bandwidth (851–870 MHz & 935–941 MHz)

Output Power 10–14 dBm 13–18 dBm (800 MHz),

14–18 dBm (900 MHz)

Current Draw (Maximum) 0.05 A from 14.2 VDC supply

0.15 A from 10 VDC supply

0.1 A from 8 VDC supply

0.05 A from 14.2 VDC supply

0.15 A from 10 VDC supply

0.1 A from 8 VDC supply

Harmonics -20 dBc -20 dBc

Note If a frequency change is requested by the SCM microprocessor, the lowpass loop filter is

momentarily bypassed to accelerate the frequency change (via a SYNTH ADAPT signal

from the SCM).

3-4 MTR3000 Exciter Module: Functional Theory of Operation

3.3.1.1.2 Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)

The DC control voltage from the synthesizer is fed to dual VCOs which generate the RF carrier

signal. Within each band, one VCO generates signals in the upper half of the band, while the other

VCO generates signals in the lower half of the band. Only one VCO is active at a time. Selection of

the active VCO is provided by a VCO_SELECT signal from the PLL IC.

The active VCO responds to the DC control voltage and generates the appropriate RF signal. This

signal is fed through impedance matching, amplification, and filtering and is output to the RF Switch

Circuitry. A sample of the output is returned to the PLL IC to serve as a VCO feedback signal.

3.3.1.1.3 Modulation

The Exciter uses dual-port FM modulator consisting of Digital Signal Processor (DSP), PLL low-port

and high port blocks, fractional-N PLL, loop filter and the VCO. The modulator is calibrated once

during factory test and its values are stored in the EEPROM. The modulator does not require any

further tuning or maintenance.

3.3.1.1.4 Amplifiers

The amplifiers consist of a driver amplifier and the final amplifier. The driver amplifier operates from a

nominal 5V supply and the final amplifier operates from a nominal 10 V supply. The driver amplifier

amplifies the VCO output signal and provides the output signal to the final amplifier. There are fixed

attenuators at the output of the driver and final amplifier to set the Exciter output power level. The

final amplifier amplifies the signal and provides a constant signal level to the PA.

3.3.1.1.5 RF Switch Circuitry

The modulated RF signal from the VCO is fed through a buffer, driver, attenuator and finally to an RF

switch circuit. Signal EX_ENABLE from the SCM controls the switch and final amplifier. The RF

signal is passed through a LPF and to a BNC connector mounted in one corner of the module, just

outside the module cover. A short coaxial cable connects the Exciter output to the power amplifier

module.

3.3.1.2 Data Communications

3.3.1.2.1 Communications with Station Control Module

Data communications between the Exciter and the Station Control Module microprocessor (μP) is

performed via a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus. This bus allows the SCM μP to send data to

the synthesizer PLL IC (to select frequency) and to read the ADC Converter IC.

3.3.1.2.2 ADC Converter Circuitry

Analog signals from various strategic operating points throughout the Exciter board are fed to an

ADC converter, which converts them to a digital signal and, upon request by the Station Control

Module, outputs the signal to the Station Control Module via the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus.

3.3.1.3 Voltage Regulation/Filtering Circuitry

The voltage regulator circuitry consists of a +5 V, +3.3 V and +2.775 V regulators that supplies power

to the digital circuitry and the PLL. The +12 V regulator is used to supply power to the VCO and the

+10 V supplies power to the final device.

MTR3000 Exciter Module 3-5

Figure 3-2 Exciter Module Functional Block Diagram

Backplane Connector

10V

14.2V

Bus

SPI Circuitry

- CPLD

- ADC

- NVM

- PLL

PLL

Driver Final

Output

Connecto

U4700 U4701

U4800

Switch LPF

Loop Filter

VCO_1

VCO_2

Switch

Driver

SSI Bus

Buffer

Pre-Scalar

U4500

Ex Enable

Regulators

Amplifiers Phase-Locked Loop VCO RF Switch Circuitry

Q4602

3-6 MTR3000 Exciter Module

Notes

MTR3000 Exciter Module: Basic Troubleshooting 3-7

3.4 Basic Troubleshooting

3.4.1 Replacement Procedure

The RDAC application is used as a general guide for basic troubleshooting. Use this application to

check the Transmit (Tx) lock alarm, as the initial step to identifying faults to the Exciter module.

For procedure to replace the Exciter module, refer to Section 14.7.2.4 on page 14-9.

Notes

3-8 MTR3000 Exciter Module: Basic Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 MTR3000 Power Amplifier

4.1 Description

The Power Amplifier (PA) is described in this section. A general description, identification of inputs

and outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are provided. The

information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module,

allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level.

4.1.1 General Description

The Power Amplifier (PA) is a forced convection-cooled RF power amplifier. It accepts a low-level

modulated RF signal from the Exciter Module, and amplifies it for transmission via the site transmit

antenna port. The PA is non-linear, and is therefore used for continuous wave (CW) applications

only. The output power is continually monitored and regulated by a feedback and control loop, with a

power output control voltage being generated by the transmitter control circuitry located on the PA

Input/Output boards.

4.1.1.1 Overview of Circuitry

The Power Amplifier contains the following sub-circuits:

• DC Distribution Board – Main interface for the PA to the Station Control Module (SCM) and

Power Supply (PS). This board contains PA SPI circuits including Analog to Digital Converter

(ADC), Digital to Analog Converter (DAC), and Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) devices, and

hardware (HW) metering circuitry

• RF Board – Provides RF signal amplification from the Exciter Module low-level signal to the

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater (BR) output power level

• Isolator – Protects the PA from damage when poor RF load conditions exist. Also assists with

intermodulation attenuation performance

• Output Board – Performs harmonic filtering and RF power detection functions, and routes the

RF signal to the antenna port

Note If the station is an upgraded MTR2000, refer to MTR2000 Basic Service Manual (included

with the original MTR2000 station) for all PA information.

4-2 MTR3000 Power Amplifier: Description

4.1.1.2 Input and Output Connections

Figure 4-1 shows the PA input and output external connections.

Front

Figure 4-1 PA Input/Output

Outside View

Inside View

Front

Back

PA I/O Connector To SCM through the

Backplane Interface Board

Input From

Power Supply

RF Input From

Exciter Module

Transmit RF

Output Connector

Back

MTR3000 Power Amplifier: Specifications 4-3

4.2 Specifications

Table 4-1 shows the specifications of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater’s Power Amplifier (PA).

4.3 Functional Theory Of Operation

The Power Amplifier (PA) is designed for continuous-duty operation across each specified band and

power level. All PA contain a multi-stage power amplifier board at the input (RF Board), a circulator

with isolation load termination, a low-pass filter/directional coupler at the output (Output Board), and

a DC Distribution Board incorporating circuitry for diagnostics and RF power control. The PA and its

sub-circuits are broad-band devices and require no manual tuning or alignment to operate over the

specified conditions.

The main interface between the PA and the rest of the base station/repeater is through the DC

Distribution Board. The DC distribution board contains the PA external I/O’s that connects to the

power supply directly through a cable and to the control module through a cable to the backplane

interface board. These I/O’s are used to distribute the DC supply buses (28.6 V and 14.2 V nominal)

from the power supply to within the PA as well as the various signals used for the control of the PA

from the SCM such as the SPI bus signals, PA enable, and the reset line.

The DC Distribution Board contains the SPI circuitry as well as metering circuitry used by both SW

and internal PA HW for determining when fault conditions are present and take appropriate action

when needed. A brief description of the PA SPI devices is shown below.

• Customer Programmable Logic Device (CPLD): Main PA SPI interface, with all other PA SPI

devices connected through this device

• Non-Volatile Memory (NVM): Used to store calibration data and identification information

• Digital to Analog Converter (DAC): Converts SW digital signals to analog within the PA. This

controls the PA fan, power control circuit, and some other circuits within the PA

• Analog to Digital Converter (ADC): Converts analog signals within the PA to digital for SW

interface. These signals are used by SW for HW metering

Table 4-1 Specifications of Power Amplifier

Parameter

Specification

UHF 800/900 MHz

Operational Frequency Range 403–470 MHz (UHF R1) or

470–524 MHz (UHF R2)

851–941 MHz

Minimum Input Return Loss (Tx mode) 7 dB 10 dB

Rated RF Output Power Range 8–100 W 8–100 W

Rated RF Input Power Range 9.8–14 dBm 12.8–18.5 dBm

28.6 V Supply Nominal Voltage (AC Power) 28.6 V (+/- 4%) 28.6 V (+/- 4%)

14.2 V Supply Nominal Voltage 14.2 V (+/- 3%) 14.2 V (+/- 3%)

28.6 V Supply Maximum Current Draw 12.6 A 12.6 A

14.2 V Supply Maximum Current Draw 2.0 A 2.0 A

Maximum Standby Power Consumption 1.2 W 1.5 W

4-4 MTR3000 Power Amplifier: Functional Theory Of Operation

A combination of software (SW) and hardware (HW) controls are used to regulate the PA RF output

power level. By way of software control, the SCM programs RF output power through the SPI bus.

Once programmed, the PA power control loop will level the output power to the requested level, if

possible. The requested output power may not be achievable if an alarm condition is present, and

output power may be reduced by way of SW or HW control if alarm conditions are present.

Within the base station/repeater, the modulated RF signal passes from the Exciter Module to the

driver amplifier within the PA. The driver amplifier is located on the RF Board and is a multi-stage

amplifier circuit that amplifies the RF input signal up to a maximum of approximately 4 W, as needed

to achieve the software requested base station/repeater RF output power. The RF signal from the

driver amplifier is further amplified by the final amplifier stage, which is also located on the RF Board

and consists of multiple paralleled RF devices with associated splitting and combining circuitry.

This RF signal then passes through a circulator and harmonic (low pass) filter, through an RF

directional coupler, and is output to the site transmit antenna port. The circulator prevents a high

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) at the PA output from damaging the final amplifier devices,

and also improves intermodulation attenuation (IMA) performance by providing isolation to the final

amplifier. The harmonic filter attenuates the harmonic levels generated by the preceding RF amplifier

devices.

The RF directional coupler is a calibrated wattmeter, with its calibration information stored in the PA

NVM. The forward and reverse power wattmeter provides a signal corresponding to the measured

output power to the ADC for metering purposes so that SW can monitor the PA or base station/

repeater output power. Also, this voltage is provided to the power control circuitry within the PA to

serve as the feedback signal in the power control loop for setting output power. The forward power

meter along with the reverse power meter is used by SW to measure the VSWR presented to the PA

output and to determine when an alarm condition is present.

The SW requested power level may include one or more SW controlled adjustments based on

various alarm conditions, if present, generated from monitored PA metering signals which are fed

back to the SCM via an ADC converter. Using the ADC metering circuitry, SW monitors the PA for

alarm conditions, such as high reflected power/VSWR or high/low supply voltage, and takes action to

reduce output power or dekey the station accordingly in order to protect the HW from damage or

improper operation.

Temperature monitoring circuitry is also contained within the PA. When the temperature reaches a

certain threshold, the PA fan turns on to reduce the operating temperature of the PA. If the

temperature continues to rise and reaches another predefined threshold, the base station/repeater

output power may also be reduced in order to protect the HW from thermal failure. Both the fan

control and the power control manipulation for thermal protection is fully HW controlled, and requires

no SW interaction.

Note For procedure to replace the PA fan, refer to Section 14.7.2.1 on page 14-6.

MTR3000 Power Amplifier 4-5

Figure 4-2 Power Amplifier Functional Block Diagram

DC Distribution Board

Power Control

Circuitry

RF Board

Output

Board

Driver Amplifier

Q2100 Q2300

Final Amplifier

RF Input

Connector

Forward

Power

Detector

Harmonic

Filter

Circulator

Reverse

Power

Detector

50 Ohm

Load

RF Output

Connector

Backplane

Connector

(10 Pin)

SPI Circuitry

-CPLD

-DAC

-ADC

-NVM

SPI

Buss

Metering

Circuitry

28.6V

Buss

14.2V

Buss

Power Supply

Connector

Power

Control

Voltage

Q4300

Q4400

Q4600

Q4500

U4110

U4120

U4130

U4920

U4930

U4910

4-6 MTR3000 Power Amplifier

Notes

MTR3000 Power Amplifier: Basic Troubleshooting 4-7

4.4 Basic Troubleshooting

4.4.1 Replacement Procedure

The RDAC application is used as a general guide for basic troubleshooting. Use this application to

check the Low RF Power, VSWR, Voltage, Fan Failure and temperature parameters, as the initial

step to identify faults to the Power Amplifier.

For procedure to replace the Power Amplifier, refer to Section 14.7.2.2 on page 14-7.

Notes

4-8 MTR3000 Power Amplifier: Basic Troubleshooting

Chapter 5 MTR3000 Station Control Module

5.1 Description

The Station Control Module (SCM) is described in this section. A general description, identification of

controls, indicators, and inputs/outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of

operation are provided. The information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional

understanding of the module, allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level.

5.1.1 General Description

The SCM circuitry performs the digital signal processing, data formatting and audio routing for the

MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater (BR) and provides the external interfaces to the rest of the site.

The SCM uses two TI OMAP1710 processors

• One for transmit and overall base station/repeater control functionalities

• One for all receive functionalities

Both OMAP1710 processors have independent boot Flash and RAM and, therefore can boot

independently.

General SCM functionality includes:

• Data and Control interface to the Receiver’s Abacus III devices

• Data and Control interface to the Receiver’s Trident chip set

• Data and Control interface to the Exciter’s Trident chip set

• Audio Codec interface with MAKO IC

• Host memory size, speed, and types supported

• External ports (Ethernet, USB, speaker and microphone)

• External physical interfaces (connectors, LEDs, external references etc.)

• Tx/Rx DSP Multi-Channel Buffered Serial Port (MCBSP) interfaces

• Intermodule communication (using SPI)

• Internal station reference generation

- OCXO (DLN6718)

- TCXO (DLN6719)

5-2 MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation

5.1.1.1 Input and Output Connections

Figure 5-1 shows the SCM input and output external connections.

5.2 Functional Theory of Operation

The following theory of operation describes the operation of the SCM at a functional level. Refer to

Figure 5-2 for the block diagram of the SCM supply voltage circuitry.

5.2.1 Tx OMAP

The Tx DSP is a TI OMAP Multimedia Processor. The OMAP1710 consists of a microprocessor unit

(MPU) subsystem and a digital signal processor (DSP) subsystem.

OMAP1710 has dedicated external memory interface that allow point-to-point connection to

standard mobile SDRAM/DDR and mobile flash devices. It is a low-power device (1.4 V Core and

1.8 V I/O supply). Tx OMAP handles all transmit tasks of the SCM.

Figure 5-1 Station Control Module Indicators and Input/Output Connections

Receiver I/O Connector –

To Receiver Module

Exciter I/O Connector –

To Exciter Module

5/10 MHz External

Reference Signal Service Speaker

Connector

USB

Connector

Service Microphone

Connector

Edge Connector

– connects to J3 on the

Backplane Interface Board

Ethernet

Connector

MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation 5-3

5.2.1.1 External Memory

Both transmit and receive DSP’s support independent external memory banks.

5.2.1.1.1 RAM

The SCM supports Mobile Double Data Rate SDRAM. It has the following basic characteristics:

• 32 MB organized as 4 Mb x 16 x 4 Banks

• Four internal banks for concurrent operation

• Programmable burst lengths: 2, 4, or 8 bytes

• Auto refresh and self refresh modes

• Selectable output drive (DS)

• VDD/VDDQ = 1.7–1.95 V

The maximum external clock rate for the DDR is 90 MHz. Since data is transferred on both clock

edges, the effective data rate is 180 Mwords/s.

5.2.1.1.2 Flash

The SCM supports 256 MB external flash memory. The device has the following basic

characteristics:

• Four 32 KBytes Bottom Boot Sectors

• 128 KBytes main blocks (254 for 256 Mbit part, 514 for 512 MBit part)

• 1.8V VCC and VCCO

5.2.1.2 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)

The station local and Intermodule SPI Bus is controlled by both Tx and Rx OMAP1710 processors,

which has an on-chip SPIF (fast SPI) interface. The OMAP1710 SPIF supports master and slave

modes, programmable clock rate, phase, polarity, programmable word size, programmable bit

ordering, and loopback.

Before an SPI data transfer can take place, the SPI master (initiator) must assert the select line of

the slave (target) device. The OMAP1710 is always the SPI master for base station/repeater. To

simplify overall SPI architecture for base station/repeater, address decoding is used instead of

individual device chip signals. This approach not only minimizes the number of GPIOs needed for

device chip select, it also provides flexibility for future expansion. This device address decoding is

handled by an Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) on the SCM and a Customer Programmable

Logic Device (CPLD) on each FRU’s, except the Power Supply.

The FPGA SPI module performs address and chip select decoding, level shifting, and signal mixing

for both the Tx OMAP SPI bus and the Rx OMAP SPI bus. Simultaneous Rx and Tx SPI accesses

are allowed. The Tx and Rx SPI are 100% independent.

5-4 MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation

5.2.1.3 Station Reference

The SCM is offered in two versions, a TCXO version (DLN6719) for UHF band and an OCXO version

(DLN6718) for 800/900 MHz band. A TCXO provides the frequency reference for the base station/

repeater for a TXCO controller kit. For the 800/900 MHz controller kit, an OCXO provides the

frequency reference for the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater. The TCXO/OCXO output is 16.8 MHz.

The FPGA is used to create other clocks locked to the TCXO/OCXO which are needed by various

devices on the SCM. The clocks are summarized in Table 5-1:

Table 5-2 summarizes the FCC required frequency stability requirements for various bands.

5.2.2 Rx OMAP

The Rx DSP is a TI OMAP Multimedia Processor. The OMAP1710 consists of a microprocessor unit

(MPU) subsystem and a digital signal processor (DSP) subsystem. OMAP1710 has dedicated

external memory interface that allows point-to-point connection to standard mobile SDRAM/DDR

and mobile flash devices. It is a low-power device (1.4 V Core and 1.8 V I/O supply). The Rx OMAP

handles receiving tasks of the SCM only.

Table 5-1 Station Control Module (SCM) FPGA output Frequencies

Frequency Destination

12 MHz Tx OMAP, Rx OMAP

24.576 MHz MAKO

32.768 kHz Tx OMAP, Rx OMAP, MAKO

Table 5-2 Station Control Module (SCM) FCC Frequency Stability Requirement

Required

Stability

(ppm)

TCXO Service Interval OCXO Service Interval

5 5 years 10 years

2.5 2 years 10 years

1.5 1 year 10 years

1 6 months 10 years

0.5 External Reference required 5 years

0.1 External Reference required 1 year

Note The TCXO version (DLN6719) is for UHF band and the OCXO version (DLN6718) is for

800/900 MHz band.

MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation 5-5

5.2.3 MAKO

MAKO IC is a customized IC and the SCM uses this device to leverage some unique functionality

that it provides.

Most of the MAKO functionalities are not used on the SCM. Only the MAKO codec, USB driver, ADC,

DAC, and some voltage regulators are used on the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater. The 9 channel

general purpose ADC is used for various controller metering.

5.2.4 Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA)

The SCM FPGA includes the following major functions:

• External reference watchdog

• SPI Address decoding and buffering

• TCXO Phase detection and compensation

• Clock generation

• Reset controller

• External Interface (Wireline SSI, LED, etc.)

FPGA field upgrade capability is also supported on the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater.

5.2.5 Audio

There are four transmit inputs: Tx Audio, Tx Audio-Pre & Tx Data on the backplane interface board

25-Pin connector, and the microphone input on a front panel RJ45 connector.

Tx Audio is a flat (not pre-emphasized) input which is used if the incoming transmit audio signal is

already pre-emphasized or if pre-emphasis is not needed. The Tx Audio-Pre input provides a

hardware pre-emphasis filter. The Tx Data input is used for low speed data, Private-Line (PL) and

Digital Private Line (DPL) signals.

The Tx Audio, Tx Audio-Pre and microphone inputs pass through a hardware modulation limiter and

splatter filter before being summed with Tx Data, with the Tx Data bypassing the limiter and splatter

filter. This summed signal is applied to the MAKO codec “mic” input. The audio signal without Tx

Data is provided on the MAKO codec “aux_mic” input.

There are three receive outputs: Rx Audio & Aux Rx Audio on the backplane interface board 25-Pin

connector and speaker audio on a front panel RJ11.

The speaker audio is the sum of the MAKO codec output (demodulated audio) and transmit audio. A

high pass filter removes any data, PL or DPL from the speaker audio. A programmable attenuator is

used to adjust the speaker audio level before being output on the RJ11 connector.

Aux Rx Audio is the output of the MAKO codec (demodulated audio), and Rx Audio is the sum of the

MAKO codec output and the microphone audio.

Refer to Figure 5-2 for audio paths and voltage levels.

5-6 MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation

Figure 5-2. Station Control Module (SCM) Audio Path

Refer to Table 5-3 for description on audio signals.

Table 5-3 Station Control Module (SCM) Audio Level

Audio Signal Description

Tx Audio The Tx Audio input provides no pre-emphasis. The nominal level of 80 mVrms

(226 mVpp) produces 60% Relative Standard Deviation (RSD).

Tx Audio-Pre The Tx Audio-Pre input provides a pre-emphasis network. The nominal level of

80 mVrms (226 mVpp) produces 60% RSD.

Tx Data Transmit data, PL or DPL signaling. The nominal level of 80 mVrms (226 mVpp)

produces 12% RSD.

Mic Local microphone Input. Use microphone type GMN6147 (older model) or

GMMN4063. Modulation sensitivity for 60% system deviation is typically

56 mVrms (158 mVpp).

Note : The Mic port is only supported in analog mode regardless of the Mic used.

For older model of microphone (GMN6147), the 3 control buttons for speaker

volume control, Rx monitor and Intercom control functions are not supported.

Rx Audio An RF input signal with 60% RSD provides an Rx Audio output of 330 mVrms into

50 kΩ. Also a microphone input of 56 mVrms provides an Rx Audio output of 330

mVrms into 50 kΩ. The Rx Audio output has DC bias of 2.5 VDC.

Aux Rx Audio An RF input signal with 60% RSD provides an Aux Rx Audio output of 330 mVrms

into 50 kΩ. The Aux Rx Audio output has a DC bias of 2.5 VDC.

Speaker Output to Powered Voice speaker. Adjustable between 0 to 500 mVrms [1.4 Vpp]

across 2.4 kΩ @ 60% system deviation. Audio signal appears between Pins 3 and

4 on the connector. Must use speaker type HSN1000 (older model) or HSN1006

via adapter cable Part.No. 0185180U01.

Note : The Speaker port is only supported in analog mode regardless of the

speaker used.

Rx Audio

Mic

+ +

Limiter

1.0 Vpp

Max

MPUIO0

Splatter

filter

Aux Mic

Mic In

Speaker Out

(to amplified speaker)

80 mVrms

226 mVpp

Attn

330 mVrms

933 mVpp

(into 50K Ohms)

56 mVrms

158 mVpp

0 to 500mVrms

0to 1.4 Vpp

Nominal levels for 60% FSD with

1KHz tone

High

Pass

Filter

I2C Audio

Attenuator0

MPUIO13

De-

Emphasis

Pre-

Emphasis

Pre-

Emphasis

MPUIO10

Aux Rx Audio

VC_OUT

AUX_MIC

MIC

MAKO

CODEC

Default Path selected

221 mVrms

625 mVpp

Attn

80 mVrms Voice

16mVrms data

74 mVrms

209 mVpp

Tx Data/PL/DPL

80 mVrms

226 mVpp

Tx Audio -Pre

Tx Audio -Flat

MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation 5-7

5.2.6 Ethernet Interface

Since OMAP1710 does not support a direct Ethernet interface, a bridge device is needed to support

Ethernet on the SCM. The bridge device is a high performance hi-speed USB 2.0 to 10/100 Ethernet

controller. The device contains an integrated 10/100 Ethernet PHY, USB PHY, Hi-Speed USB 2.0

device controller, 10/100 Ethernet MAC, TAP controller, EEPROM controller and a FIFO controller

with a total of 30 KBytes of internal packet buffering. The following is a list for functionality that the

Ethernet Interface provides:

• Fully Compliant with IEEE 802.3 and 802.3u Compatible Ethernet Controller

• 10Base-T and 100Base-Tx support

• Integrated Media Access Control (MAC) and PHYsical (PHY)

• Supports one 10BT port with automatic polarity detection and correction

• Supports full and half duplex mode and flow control

• Universal Serial Bus (USB) and Joint Test Action Group (JTAG) parameters

5.2.7 Backplane Interface Board

The connector that connects the controller to the backplane interface board is a right angle, 96-Pin

Connector. It provides connectivity between the MTR3000 controller and other station FRU, such as

the Wireline card, the AUXIO card as well as, the third party equipment.

5.2.8 Exciter

The connector used to connect the controller to the Exciter and Receiver is a dual row, right angle,

early entry receptacle, without flange, 30-Pin Connector. It provides 16.8 MHz reference clock,

14.2V, 10V and 8V supply voltage, SPI, Trident SSI and other digital handshake signals with the

Exciter.

5.2.9 Receiver

The connector used to connect the controller to the Exciter and Receiver is a dual row, right angle,

early entry receptacle, without flange, 30-Pin Connector. It provides 16.8 MHz reference clock,

14.2V, 10V and 8V supply voltage, SPI, Abacus SPI/SSI, Trident SPI and other digital handshake

signals with the Receiver.

Note When using third party controllers, refer to "Appendix E" for CPS configuration in

conjunction with the selection of the correct Tx Audio paths to prevent a double pre-

emphasis.

5-8 MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation

5.2.10 Front Panel (FP) Connectors

Table 5-4 to Table 5-9 describe the front panel connectors.

Table 5-4 Station Control Module (SCM) FP Connectors

Connector

Name Connector Type Purpose

Service USB Type B Service Computer connection. This connector is accessible with front

cover in place.VBUS (+5V) is not provided on the USB connector.

Mic RJ45 (8 Pin) Microphone connection. Compatible with microphone GMN6147 (older

model) or GMMN4063. This connector is accessible with front cover in

place.

Note : The Mic port is only supported in analog mode regardless of the

Mic used. For older model of microphone (GMN6147), the 3 control

buttons for speaker volume control, Rx monitor and Intercom control

functions are not supported.

Speaker 4P4C Speaker connection. Compatible with Service Speaker HSN1000

(older model) or HSN1006. This connector is accessible with front

cover in place.

Note : The Speaker port is only supported in analog mode regardless

of the speaker used.

Ethernet RJ45 (8 Pin)

(Vertical)

Network connection to Trunking Controller. The front cover must be

removed to access this connector. An optional extension cable can

also be used to route this input to the rear of the station. Alternatively,

the Ethernet cable can also be routed out through the slots provided in

the front panel.

Ext Ref BNC (Vertical) External reference input. The front cover must be removed to access

this connector. Alternatively, an extension cable can be used to route

this input to the rear of the station.

Table 5-5 Station Control Module (SCM) FP USB Connector Pin-out

Pin Number Pin Name I/O Voltage

Level (V) Pin Description

1 VCC VCC 5 Supply Voltage for USB Client mode

2 DM I/O 3.3 Connects to MAKO USB1 transceiver

3 DP I/O 3.3 Connects to MAKO USB1 transceiver

4 GND GND GND Ground

G1 GND GND GND Ground

G2 GND GND GND Ground

MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation 5-9

Table 5-6 Station Control Module (SCM) FP Microphone Connector Pin-out

MIC

Connector Pin

Number

Schematic

Pin Number Pin Name I/O Voltage Level Pin Description

1 5 NC NC NC No Connect

2 4 RESERVED Input 5V Pin is reserved for

future expansion.

3 6 MIC_PTT* Input 0 to 5V Voltage generated by

PTT button.

4 3 MIC_AUDIO Input 850mVpp Audio Input, Level

indicated here is the

maximum value.

5 7 GND GND GND Ground

6 2 NC NC NC No Connect

7 8 NC NC NC No Connect

8 1 NC NC NC No Connect

G1 G1 GND GND GND Ground

G2 G2 GND GND GND Ground

From the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater front view, the MIC connector pin 1 to pin 8 are arranged from right to left sequentially.

Note The schematic pin number and MIC pin number does not match due to imprecise

geometry and this will remain, since it is widely used in other kits within Motorola.

Table 5-7 Station Control Module (SCM) FP Speaker Connector Pin-out

Pin Number Pin Name I/O Voltage

Level (V) Pin Description

1 GND GND GND Ground

2 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V 14.2V supplied to the speaker

3 GND GND GND Ground

4 SPEAKER_AUDIO Output 1.4Vpp Audio Output. Level indicated

here is the maximum value.

G1 GND GND GND Ground

G2 GND GND GND Ground

From the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater front view, the SPEAKER connector pin 1 to pin 4 are arranged from left to right

sequentially.

5-10 MTR3000 Station Control Module: Functional Theory of Operation

5.2.11 Front Panel LEDs

For details on this section, refer to Table 1-8.

5.2.12 Supply Voltage Circuitry

The SCM contains on-board regulator and filtering circuitry to generate the various operating

voltages required by the SCM circuitry. The SCM routes +10 V and +8 V from two regulators on the

backplane interface board to the Receiver and Exciter modules. +14.2 V and +5.1 V from the power

supply (via the backplane interface board) are used as sources for the following supply voltage

circuits:

• +14.2 V Regulator Circuitry – input to generate 9.3 V for MAKO, and 5 V analog for the audio

circuit. This regulator also routes 14 VDC to the Receiver and Exciter modules.

• +5.1 V Regulator Circuitry – input to generate the following voltages: 3.3 V, 3.3 V analog,

2.775 V analog, 1.875 V, 1.4 V Core for Tx and Rx OMAP1710, 1.2 V Core for FPGA.

Table 5-8 Station Control Module (SCM) FP Ethernet Connector Pin-out

Pin Number Pin Name I/O Voltage

Level (V) Pin Description

1 ENET_TXN_FP Output 5 Ethernet Tx negative

2 ENET_TXN_FP Output 5 Ethernet Tx positive

3 ENET_RXN_FP Input 5 Ethernet Rx negative

4 GND GND GND Ground

5 GND GND GND Ground

6 ENET_RXP_FP Input 5 Ethernet Rx positive

7 GND GND GND Ground

8 GND GND GND Ground

G1 GND GND GND Ground

G2 GND GND GND Ground

Table 5-9 Station Control Module (SCM) FP External Reference Connector Pin-out

Pin Number Pin Name I/O Voltage

Level (V) Pin Description

C EXT_REFERENCE Input 5 5 MHz or 10 MHz external reference.

This can be either a sine or a square

wave.

G1 GND GND GND Ground

G2 GND GND GND Ground

G3 GND GND GND Ground

G4 GND GND GND Ground

MTR3000 Station Control Module 5-11

Add/Data

OMAP 1710

Receive

DDR

32MByte

16Mx16

FLASH

32MByte

16Mx16

Receiver

Connector

SSI

OMAP 1710

Transmit

Add/Data

Exciter

Connector

SSI

MAKO McBSP 2

EMIFS

EMIFF

McBSP 2

EMIFS

EMIFF

SPI

McBSP3

McBSP3 SSI

Abacus SSI

McBSP 1CODEC SSI

PORESET

SPIF

PORESET

Backplane

Connector

RX SPI

Trident SSI

SPIF

32.768KHz

24.576MHz

XTAL32IN

XIN

12MHz

32.768KHz CLK32K

CLK PLL

MTR2000 WL12 & WL34 SSI

USB 2

USB 0

USB

Front

Panel

RX Audio CODEC

AUDIO

Mic In

Speaker Out

Audio

Attenuator

I2C

To TX OMAP

Mic

TX Audio (PRE)

USB 0

USB 2

USB-To-

Ethernet

USB

10BaseT Ethernet

(RJ45)

MTR2K Wireline12

SSI

MTR2K Wireline34

SSI

Backplane SPI

Station

Reference

FPGA

Reference In

(BNC)

A/D Input s

Analog Monitor

I2C

I2CTo Audio Attn

Level

Shift

RX16.8MHz

EX 16.8MHz

MCSI 1

AUX RX Audio

UART 1 RS232

XCVR

Test

Header

LEDs

Power/Status

Tx Status 1

Tx Status 2

Rx Status 1

Rx Status 2

Mode

Ethernet

Ext Ref

FPGA

Aba SPI

DDR

32MByte

16Mx16

FLASH

32MByte

16Mx16

Limiter

1.0 Vpp Max

Splatter

filter

USB 1

I2C

To WB CODEC

USB

XCVRTest

Header

UART 1 RS232

XCVRTest

Header

USB 1 USB

XCVRTest

Header

Aux Mic

MCSI 1

Codec SSI

ResetTo RX & TX OMAP

16.8MHz

T C X O/

Charge

Pump Loop

Filter

Mux

DAC

EX 16.8MHZ

RX 16.8MHZ

32.768KHz

24.576MHz

12MHz

Reset

From FPGA

From FPGA Reset

12MHz

32.768KHz CLK32K

CLK PLL

Control &

StatusGPIO

TX SPIF

RX SPIF

EX/BP SPI

RX SPI

Level

Shift

Ex SPI

EX/BP SPI

From FPGA

EX/BP SPI From FPGA

To MAKO and Exciter

To Receiver

RX SPI

From FPGA

FP PUSH

BUTTON RST

Note: MTR2000 Wireline is not a supported feature for the MTR3000

first release. The circuit will not be placed, and is reserved for future need.

High

Pass

Filter

De-

Emphasis

Attn

TOMAP MPUIO 0

TX Data/PL/DPL

Pre-

Emphasis

Pre-

Emphasis

TXOMAP

MPUIO 10

TXOMAP

MPUIO13

Default Path selected

TX Audio (Flat)

Figure 5-2 Station Control Module Functional Block Diagram - Station Control Circuitry

5-12 MTR3000 Station Control Module

Notes

MTR3000 Station Control Module: Basic Troubleshooting 5-13

5.3 Basic Troubleshooting

5.3.1 Replacement Procedure

The RDAC application is used as a general guide for basic troubleshooting, and should be used as

the initial step to identifying faults to the SCM.

For procedure to replace the SCM, refer to Section 14.7.2.5 on page 14-11.

5.3.2 Post-Replacement Optimization Procedure

1. Replacement Station Control Modules are shipped with a default data programmed into the

codeplug (Flash EPROM located on board). After replacing a Station Control Module,

download the codeplug data (unique to the particular station) to the replacement module

codeplug. Simply retrieve the file from the archive and follow the instructions in the CPS

online help facility for saving data to the codeplug.

2. Calibrate the reference oscillator (station reference) by performing the procedure in

Section 14.3.3 on page 14-2.

3. Perform the Tx Deviation Gain Adjust alignment procedure located in the Tuner Service menu

online help facility (also noted in Section 13.6 on page 13-14 of this manual).

4. If a MTR3000 Wireline Interface Board is installed, perform all relevant alignments according

to the Tuner Service menu online help facility (also noted in Section 13.5 on page 13-5 of this

manual).

Notes

5-14 MTR3000 Station Control Module:: Basic Troubleshooting

Chapter 6 MTR3000 Backplane

6.1 Description

The Backplane Interface Board provides the electrical interconnections between the Station Control

Module (SCM), the Power Supply, the Power Amplifier, and any optional plug-in modules of the

base station/repeater. The board also provides the connectors necessary to interface the base

station/repeater to phone lines, peripheral RF equipment, and other communications and

maintenance equipment. This section provides a general description, identification of inputs/outputs,

and a pin-out listing for all connectors, including information on signal names, functions, and levels.

6.1.1 General Description

The Backplane Interface Board (mounted across the rear of the base station/repeater) is

constructed with connectors on both sides. The connectors on one side connects to various base

station/repeater plug-in modules (such as the SCM, Wireline Interface Board and Auxiliary I/O

option board); the connectors on the other side allow interface connections between the base

station/repeater and the phone lines, Power Supply, PA control signals, antenna relay, and other

communications and maintenance equipment. A metal shield mounts over the rear of the backplane

interface board to provide protection for the circuit board foils and connector solder pads, as well as

Electro Static Discharge (ESD) protection and EMI/RFI shielding, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Note The Auxiliary I/O option board is not available for the 800/900 MHz band.

6-2 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Figure 6-1 Backplane Interface Board

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-3

6.1.1.1 Location of Backplane Interface Board Connectors

Figure 6-2 shows the location of the connectors on each side of the Backplane Interface Board.

Figure 6-2 Backplane Interface Board Connector Locations (Front and Rear View)

P10

Antenna Relay/

Ptemp+ Connector

F1, F2

Fuses

Connects to

Wireline Interface

Board

Connects to

Option Board no.1

Connects to

Option Board no.2

Connects to

Station Control Module

Connects to

Control Cable From

Power Amplifier

Connects to Power

Supply Cable

System Connector

Aux Connector

Front View

Rear View

Wireline Connector

6-4 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

6.1.1.2 Backplane Interface Board Connectors Information

Each connector on the backplane interface board has been assigned a connector designation

number. For rear connectors, the connector number is stamped onto the metal shield covering the

rear of the backplane interface board. Labels for connectors which accept the plug-in modules are

viewable when the front panel is removed. Table 6-1 lists each connector and its assigned

designation number.

Table 6-2 provides a detailed description of all of the backplane interface board signals, arranged in

alphanumeric order.

As shown, each connector Pin is defined by signal name, input or output (with reference to

connector), and the to/from location(s).

Table 6-1 Assigned Connector Number Vs. Function/Location Information

Note An asterisk (*) indicates an active on low signal.

Connector Function/Location

J1 96-Pin Eurocard connector; accepts plug-in Option Board 1

(From front of base station/repeater, behind front panel)

J2 96-Pin Eurocard connector; accepts plug-in Option Board 2

(From front of base station/repeater, behind front panel)

J3 96-Pin Eurocard connector; accepts plug-in Station Control

Module (From front of base station/repeater, behind front panel)

J4 96-Pin Eurocard connector; accepts plug-in Wireline Interface

Board (From front of base station/repeater, behind front panel)

J5 96-Pin Eurocard connector; provides System connection to

external communications equipment (At the back of the base

station/repeater)

J6 4-position terminal block with plug; accepts customer phone line

connections. The plug accepts a wire diameter range of 12 to

26 AWG (At the back of the base station/repeater)

J7 25-Pin connector; for connecting to an external device such as

a trunking controller, tone remote adaptor or phone patch.

P7 10-Pin connector; provides connection to Power Amplifier (PA);

routes SPI bus and chip selects from Station Control Module to

PA (At the back of the base station/repeater)

P8 8-Pin connector; provides connection to Power Supply (PS)

P10 Antenna Relay 3-Pin connector; supplies control signal and

power to antenna relay module; provides connection to a

peripheral temperature sensing device such as found in an

external circulator (At the back of the base station/repeater)

Note Peripheral temperature sensing device is not available for the 800/900 MHz band.

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-5

Table 6-2 Backplane Interface Board Signal Descriptions

Signal Name Type Function/Signal Levels

5_VDC Power +5.1 VDC from Power Supply (2.0A total

maximum)

8_VDC Power +8 VDC from Regulator U102-3 (0.25A total

maximum)

10V_VDC Power +10 VDC from U101-3 to Exciter Module via

SCM (0.70A total maximum)

10V_VDC Power +10 VDC from U101-3 to Receiver Module

via SCM (0.70A total maximum)

14.2VDC Power +14.2 VDC from Power Supply (8A total

maximum to PA and backplane interface

board)

AC_Fail Digital AC status signal from power supply to SCM;

Active high indicates AC Mains failure

Accessory_14.2VDC Analog +14.2 VDC from Power Supply to Systems

connector J5 (1.0A total maximum)

Antenna_Relay Digital Open-collector control signal from Controller

to SCM to antenna relay; Low to energize

relay

Aux Rx Audio Analog Auxiliary Receive Audio – A received RF

signal at 60% RSD produces a 330mVrms

audio output.

Carrier Detect Switch Digital From SCM to indicate carrier present; TTL

active high

Chassis GND Power Station ground

Emph Tx Audio Analog Emphasized Tx Audio - 80mVrms @ 1 kHz

produces 60% transmit deviation.

Ext PTT* Digital Interrupt request to SCM to key transmitter;

TTL active low

GND Power Station ground

6-6 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

GPI_1 Digital General purpose programmable inputs/

outputs which can be configured through

CPS to one of several functions. Input levels

are 0 to 5V. Less than 0.7V is a logic low and

greater than 2V is a logic high.

GPIO_2 Digital

GPIO_3 Digital

GPI_4 Digital

GPIO_5 Digital

GPIO_6 Digital

GPIO_7 Digital

GPIO_8 Digital

GPIO_9** Digital

GPIO_10 Digital

Line 1+ Analog 4-wire Phone Line (differential) inputs; 600 Ω

typical impedance (country-specific)

Line 1-

Line 2+ Analog 2-wire Phone Line (differential) inputs/outputs

or, 4-wire Phone Line outputs; 600 Ω typical

impedance (country-specific)

Line 2-

MISO (Master In Slave Out) Digital SPI data from Slave devices to Master

(SCM); standard TTL

MOSI (Master Out Slave In) Digital SPI data from Master (SCM) to Slave

devices; standard TTL

OP1 CS1* Digital From SCM to Option 1 module; SPI bus chip

selects; TTL active low

OP1 CS2*

OP2 CS1* Digital From SCM to Option 2 module; SPI bus chip

selects; TTL active low

OP2 CS2*

Opt IRQ* Digital Interrupt request to SCM from Option cards;

TTL active low

Option1 ID Analog Option 1 ID to SCM ADC; module ID

determined by specific voltage; 0 to 5 VDC

Option2 ID Analog Option 2 ID to SCM ADC; module ID

determined by specific voltage; 0 to 5 VDC

PA AD CS* Digital From SCM; during SPI signalling, selects

ADC converter in PA; TTL active low

PA DA CS* Digital From SCM; during SPI signalling, selects

DAC converter in PA; TTL active low

PA Enable* Digital From SCM; controls final module bias in PA;

TTL active low

Table 6-2 Backplane Interface Board Signal Descriptions (Continued)

Signal Name Type Function/Signal Levels

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-7

PA Reset* Digital Resets logic devices within the PA; TTL

active low

Ptemp+ Analog Input to SCM from peripheral temperature

sensing device on circulator

Reset* Digital System reset from SCM; TTL active low

RF Relay Control In Digital From Controller to Option 1 and Option 2 to

signal RF Relay is activated; TTL active high

RF Relay Control Out Digital From Option 1 or Option 2 to SCM as open

collector (active low) to indicate RF Relay is

activated (or for some other control usages).

RSSI Analog From SCM; DC voltage proportional to the

receive RF signal strength; 0 to 5 VDC

Rx Audio Analog Receive Audio – A received RF signal at 60%

RSD produces a 330mVrms audio output.

The local microphone is summed in with the

receive audio.

Serial ID Digital Serial ID data to SCM from backplane

interface board serial ID device

SPI CLK (Serial Peripheral

Interface Clock)

Digital SCM SPI bus clock; Low-to-high transition

shifts data; 310 kHz (Minimum); standard TTL

Tx Audio Analog Transmit Audio – 80mVrms produces 60%

transmit deviation.

Tx Data Analog Low Speed Trunking Data or PL or DPL –

80mVrms produces12% transmit deviation

Wireline ID Analog To SCM ADC from WIB; module ID

determined by specific voltage; 0 to 5 VDC

Wireline1 Latch CS* Digital Chip select for SPI latch on WIB; TTL active

low

Note (*) Indicates an active low signal

Note (**) Not supported.

Table 6-2 Backplane Interface Board Signal Descriptions (Continued)

Signal Name Type Function/Signal Levels

6-8 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-3 J5 System Connector, Row A Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment Input/

Output To/From Signal Characteristics

1Reserved O – –

2 Reserved O J1-C31, J2-C31 –

3 N/C O – –

4 AC Fail O P8-5, J1-C29, J2-C29,

J3-C24

TTL output, active high

5Reserved IJ1-C28, J2-C28 –

6 Reserved I J1-C27, J2-C27 –

7Reserved IJ1-C26, J2-C26 –

8 Reserved I J1-C25, J2-C25 –

9Reserved IJ1-C24, J2-C24 –

10 Reserved O J1-C23, J2-C23 –

11 Reserved OJ1-C22, J2-C22 –

12 Reserved O J1-B25, J2-B25 –

13 Antenna Relay OP10-1, J3-C26 OCO, 200mA, active low

14 Reserved O J3-C19 –

15 N/C – – –

16 N/C – – –

17 Reserved IJ3-C16 –

18 Accessory 14.2 VDC O P8 pins 3, 4 (through F2) +14.2 VDC

19 GND –Station ground –

20 5 VDC O P8 pins 7, 8 +5.1 ± 0.25 VDC

21 Reserved OJ3-C12 –

22 Spare I J1-C11, J2-C11

23 N/C – – –

24 N/C – – –

25 N/C – – –

26 Ext PTT- I J1-C7, J2-C7 Opto-Isolated PTT Input

27 GND –Station ground –

28 Reserved I/O J1-C6, J2-C6 –

29 Ext PTT+ IJ1-C5, J2-C5 Opto-Isolated PTT Input

30 AC Fail Relay (NO) O J1-C4, J2-C4 Normally Open Relay Contact

31 GND –Station ground –

32 Accessory 14.2 VDC O P8 pins 3, 4 (through F2) +14.2 VDC

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-9

Table 6-4 J5 System Connector, Row B Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment Input/

Output To/From Signal Characteristics

1Reserved OJ1-B32, J2-B32 –

2 Reserved O J1-B31, J2-B31 –

3Carrier Operated Relay

(Common)

OJ1-B30, J2-B30 Common Relay Contact

4 Carrier Detect Switch O J1-B29, J2-B29, J3-B24 TTL output, active high

5Reserved IJ1-B28, J2-B28 –

6 Reserved I J1-B27, J2-B27 –

7Reserved IJ1-B26, J2-B26 –

8 Reserved I J3-B25 –

9Reserved I/O J1-B24, J2-B24 –

10 N/C – N/C –

11 Reserved I/O J1-B22, J2-B22 –

12 Reserved I/O J1-B23, J2-B23 –

13 Reserved –N/C –

14 Reserved I J1-B19, J2-B19, J3-B19,

J7-14

–

15 GND –Station ground –

16 N/C – – –

17 N/C – – –

18 Accessory 14.2 VDC O P8 pins 3, 4 (through F2) +14.2 VDC

19 GND –Station ground –

20 5 VDC O P8 pins 7, 8 +5.1 ± 0.25 VDC

21 Reserved OJ1-B12 –

22 N/C – – –

23 N/C – – –

24 N/C – – –

25 N/C – – –

26 N/C I J1-B7, J2-B7 –

27 GND –Station ground –

28 Reserved O J4-C10 –

29 AC Fail Relay (Common) OJ1-B4, J2-B4 Common relay contact

30 Reserved O J4-A9 –

31 GND –Station ground –

32 Accessory 14.2 VDC O P8 pins 3, 4 (through F2) +14.2 VDC

6-10 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-5 J5 System Connector, Row C Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment Input/

Output To/From Signal Characteristics

1Reserved OJ1-A32, J2-A32 –

2 Reserved O J1-A31, J2-A31, J3-A26 –

3Carrier Operated Relay (Normally

Open)

OJ1-A30, J2-A30 Normally Open Relay Contact

4 Reserved O J1-A29, J2-A29 –

5Reserved IJ1-A28, J2-A28 –

6 Reserved I J1-A27, J2-A27, J3-B26 –

7Reserved IJ1-A26, J2-A26 –

8 Reserved I J3-A25 –

9RF Relay Control Out (Auxiliary I/O) OJ1-B5, J2-B5 OCO, 200mA, 40V, active high

10 Ext PTT* Out (Auxiliary I/O) I J1-A23, J2-A23, J3-A23 TTL input

11 RSSI OJ1-A22, J2-A22, J3-A22 Typically 0.5 VDC for -120dBm to

4.5 VDC for -40dBm carrier. Variation

with carrier level at approximately

50mV/dBm. (Not available for the

UHF band).

12 Reserved I/O J1-A24, J2-A24 –

13 N/C – – –

14 Aux Rx Audio O J1-A19, J2-A19, J3-A19,

J7-3

–

15 GND –Station ground –

16 GND – Station ground –

17 Reserved OJ1-A16, J2-A16, J3-A16 –

18 Accessory 14.2 VDC O P8 pins 3, 4 (through F2) +14.2 VDC

19 GND –Station ground –

20 5 VDC O P8 pins 7, 8 +5.1 ± 0.25 VDC

21 Reserved OJ3-A12 –

22 N/C – – –

23 N/C – – –

24 GPIO_10 I/O J1-A9, J2-A9, J3-A17 TTL input/output

25 N/C – – –

26 N/C – – –

27 GND –Station ground –

28 Reserved I J4-C12 –

29 GPIO_9 I/O J1-A4, J2-A4, J3-A13 TTL input/output

30 Reserved I J4-A11 –

31 GND –Station ground –

32 Accessory 14.2 VDC O P8 pins 3, 4 (through F2) +14.2 VDC

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-11

Table 6-6 J4 Wireline Connector, Row A Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1Wireline MCLK J3-B6

2 GND Station ground

35VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 GPIO_9 J1-A4, J2-A4, J5-C29, J3-A13

5Wireline 1/2 TXD J3-A5

6 Wireline 3/4 FSYNC J3-A6

7MOSI P7-8, J1-A7, J2-A7, J3-A7

8 GND Station ground

9Reserved J5-B30

10 GPI_4 J7-23

11 Reserved –

12 GPIO_8 J7-21, J3-C29

13 Reserved J7-6, J3-A27

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 GPI_1 J7-2, J3-C32

17 Tx Audio J7-1, J3-B30

18 GPIO_3 J3-B31, J7-15

19 Tx_Data_PL_DPL J3-B29, J7-13

20 GPIO_7 J3-C30, J7-10

21 Chassis GND –

22 Spare 31 –

23 Spare 3 –

24 Spare 32 –

25 Spare 17 –

26 Line 2+ J6-4

27 Spare 4 –

28 Line 2- J6-3

29 Spare 34 –

30 Line 1+ J6- 2

31 Spare 36 –

32 Line 1- J6-1

6-12 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-7 J4 Wireline Connector, Row B Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1Spare 5 –

2 GND Station ground

35 VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 Wireline 3/4 TXD J3-B4

5Wireline 1/2 RXD J3-B5

6 Reserved J3-B7

7Spare 18 –

8 MISO J1-B8, J2-B8, J3-B8, P7-9

9 GND Station ground

10 GPIO_5 J7-24, J3-C31

11 Spare 19 –

12 EMPH Tx AUDIO J3-A29, J7-22

13 Reserved J3-B27

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 Reset* J1-B16, J2-B16, J3-B16, P7-3

17 GPIO_10 J7-5, J3-A17, J5-C24, J2-A9, J1-A9

18 Spare 20 –

19 GPIO_6 J7-25, J7-8, J3-A22

20 Reserved J1-B20, J2-B20, J3-B20

21 Chassis GND –

22 Spare 40 –

23 Spare 7 –

24 Spare 41 –

25 Spare 21 –

26 Line 2+ J6-4

27 Spare 8 –

28 Line 2- J6-3

29 Spare 43 –

30 Line 1+ J6-2

31 Spare 23 –

32 Line 1- J6-1

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-13

Table 6-8 J4 Wireline Connector, Row C Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1Wireline BCLK J3-C5

2 GND Station ground

35 VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 Wireline 3/4 RXD J3-C4

5Spare 45 –

6 Wireline 1/2 FSYNC J3-C6

7Wireline1 Latch CS* J3-C7

8 SPI CLK P7-7, J1-C8, J2-C8, J3-C8

9GND Station ground

10 Reserved J5-B28

11 Spare 10 –

12 Reserved –

13 Spare 46 –

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 Rx Audio J3-A30, J7-7

17 GPIO_9 J3-A13, J5-C29, J2-A4, J1-A4, J4-A4, J4-C17, J7-6

18 GPIO_2 J3-B32, J7-4

19 Wireline ID J3-C22

20 Reserved J1-C20, J2-C20, J3-C20

21 Chassis GND –

22 Spare 27 –

23 Spare 11 –

24 Spare 48 –

25 Spare 49 –

26 Line 2+ J6-4

27 Spare 12 –

28 Line 2- J6-2

29 Spare 26 –

30 Line 1+ J6-2

31 Spare 51 –

32 Line 1- J6-1

6-14 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-9 J3 Controller Connector, Row A Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

114.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

2 GND Station ground

35 VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 8 VDC U102-3

5Wireline 1/2 Txd J1-A5

6 Wireline 3/4 FSYNC J1-A6

7MOSI P7-8, J1-A7, J3-A7, J4-A7

8N/C N/C

9 N/C N/C

10 OP1 CS2* J1-A10

11 OP2 CS2* J2-A10

12 Reserved –

13 GPIO_9 J5-C29, J2-A4, J1-A4, J4-C17, J4-A4, J7-6

14 10 VDC Station ground

15 10 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 Spare N/C

17 GPIO_10 J1-A9, J2-A9, J3-A17, J7-5

18 Ptemp+ P10-3

19 Reserved J1-A19, J2-A19, J5-C14

20 N/C N/C

21 GND Station ground

22 RSSI J1-A22, J3-A22, J5-C11

23 Ext PTT* J1-A23, J3-A23, J5-C10

24 RF Relay Control J1-B6, J2-B6

25 Reserved –

26 Reserved –

27 Reserved J4-A3

28 GND –

29 EMPH Tx AUDIO J1-A29, J5-C4

30 Rx Audio J1-A30, J5-C3

31 GPI_4 J4-A10, J7-23

32 GPIO_6 J4-B19, J7-25

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-15

Table 6-10 J3 Controller Connector, Row B Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

114.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

2 GND Station ground

35VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 Wireline 3/4 TXD J4-B4

5Wireline 1/2 RXD J4-B5

6 Wireline MCLK J4-A1

7Wireline2 Latch CS* J4-B6

8 MISO P7-9, J1-B8, J2-B8, J4-B8

9N/C N/C

10 N/C N/C

11 OP1 CS1* J1-B11

12 OP2 CS1* J2-B11

13 PA D/A CS* P7-6

14 10 VDC Regulator U101-3

15 10 VDC Regulator U101-3

16 Reset* J1-B16, J2-B16, J4-B16, P7-3

17 N/C N/C

18 Option2 ID J2-C19

19 Reserved –

20 Reserved J1-B20, J2-B20, J4-B20

21 N/C N/C

22 GND Station ground

23 N/C N/C

24 Carrier Detect Switch J1-B29, J2-B29, J5-B4

25 Reserved –

26 Reserved –

27 Reserved J4-B13

28 GND Station ground

29 Tx_Data_PL_DPL J7-13

30 Tx Audio J7-1

31 GPIO_3 J7-15, J4-A18

32 GPIO_2 J7-4, J4-C18

6-16 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-11 J3 Controller Connector, Row C Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

114.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

2 GND Station ground

35VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 Wireline 3/4 RXD J4-C4

5Wireline BCLK J4-C1

6 Wireline 1/2 FSYNC J4-C6

7Wireline1 Latch CS* J4-C7

8 SPI CLK P7-7, J1-C8, J2-C8, J4-C8

9 N/C N/C

10 OP1 CS3* J1-C10

11 OP2 CS3* J2-C10

12 Reserved –

13 PA A/D CS* P7-10

14 GND Station ground

15 GND Station ground

16 Reserved J1-C16, J2-C16, J5-A17

17 N/C N/C

18 Option1 ID J1-C19

19 Reserved –

20 Reserved J1-C20, J2-C20, J4-C20

21 GND Station ground

22 Wireline ID J4-C19

23 Opt IRQ* J1-A25, J2-A25

24 AC Fail P8-5, J1-C29, J2-C29, J5-A4

25 Serial ID U100-2

26 Antenna Relay P10-1, J5-A13

27 PA Enable* P7-2

28 N/C N/C

29 GPIO_8 J7-21

30 GPIO_7 J7-12, J7-10

31 GPIO_5 J7-24, J4-B10

32 GPI_1 J7-2, J7-11, J4-A16

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-17

Table 6-12 J2 Option 2 Connector, Row A Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1Spare A14 –

2 GND Station ground

35VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 GPIO_9 J1-A4, J3-A13, J4-A4, J5-C29

5Spare A16 J1-A5

6 Spare A19 J1-A6

7MOSI P7-8, J1-A7, J3-A7, J4-A7

8 GND Station ground

9GPIO_10 J1-A9, J3-A17, J5-C24

10 OP2 CS2* J3-A11

11 Spare N/C

12 Spare N/C

13 Spare N/C

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 Spare N/C

17 GND Station ground

18 GND Station ground

19 Spare N/C

20 Spare N/C

21 GND Station ground

22 RSSI J1-A22, J3-A22, J5-C11

23 Ext PTT* J1-A23, J3-A23, J5-C10

24 Reserved –

25 OPT_IRQ* J1-A25, J3-C23

26 Reserved –

27 Reserved –

28 Reserved –

29 Reserved –

30 GP1 Out WCO J1-A30, J5-C3

31 Reserved –

32 Reserved –

6-18 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-13 J2 Option 2 Connector, Row B Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1Spare N/C

2 GND Station ground

35 VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 Spare81 J1-B4, J5-B29

5RF Relay Control Out J1-B5, J5-C9

6 RF Relay Control In J1-B6, J3-A24

7Spare316 J1-B7, J5-B26

8 MISO P7-9, J1-B8, J3-B8, J4-B8

9GND Station ground

10 N/C –

11 OP2 CS1* J3-B12

12 N/C –

13 N/C N/C

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 Reset* J1-B16, J3-B16, J4-B16

17 N/C N/C

18 GND Station ground

19 N/C –

20 Reserved J1-B20, J3-B20, J4-B20

21 N/C N/C

22 Reserved –

23 Reserved –

24 Reserved –

25 Reserved –

26 Reserved –

27 Reserved –

28 Reserved –

29 Carrier Detect Switch J1-B29, J3-B24, J5-B4

30 Reserved –

31 Reserved –

32 Reserved –

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-19

Table 6-14 J2 Option 2 Connector, Row C Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1 N/C –

2 GND Station ground

35 VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 Spare313 J1-C4, J3-A3

5Spare314 J1-C5, J5-A29

6 Reserved –

7Spare319 J1-C7, J5-A26

8 SPI CLK P7-7, J1-C8, J3-C8, J4-C8

9GND Station ground

10 OP2 CS3* J3-C11

11 Spare J1-C11, J5-A22

12 N/C N/C

13 N/C N/C

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 N/C N/C

17 N/C N/C

18 N/C N/C

19 Option2 ID J3-B18

20 Reserved J1-C20, J3-C20, J4-C20

21 GND Station ground

22 Reserved –

23 Reserved –

24 Reserved –

25 Reserved –

26 Reserved –

27 Reserved –

28 Reserved –

29 AC Fail P8-5, J1-C29, J3-C24, J5-A4

30 N/C N/C

31 Reserved –

32 Reserved –

6-20 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-15 J1 Option 1 Connector, Row A Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1Spare –

2 GND Station ground

35VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 GPIO_9 J2-A4, J3-A13, J4-A4, J5-C29

5Spare J2-A5

6 Spare J2-A6

7MOSI P7-8, J2-A7, J3-A7, J4-A7

8 GND Station ground

9GPIO_10 J2-A9, J3-A17, J5-C24

10 OP1 CS2* J3-A10

11 Spare N/C

12 Spare N/C

13 Spare N/C

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 Spare N/C

17 GND Station ground

18 GND Station ground

19 Spare N/C

20 Spare N/C

21 GND Station ground

22 RSSI J2-A22, J3-A22, J5-C11

23 Ext PTT* J2-A23, J3-A23, J5-C10

24 Reserved –

25 Opt_IRQ* J2-A25, J3-C23

26 Reserved –

27 Reserved –

28 Reserved –

29 Reserved –

30 GP1 OUT WCO J2-A30, J5-C3

31 Reserved –

32 Reserved –

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-21

Table 6-16 J1 Option 1 Connector, Row B Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1Spare A12 J2-B1

2 GND Station ground

35 VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 Spare81 J2-B4, J5-B29

5RF Relay Control Out J2-B5, J5-C9

6 RF Relay Control In J2-B6, J3-A24

7Spare316 J2-B7, J5-B26

8 MISO P7-9, J2-B8, J3-B8, J4-B8

9 GND Station ground

10 Reserved –

11 OP1 CS1* J3-B11

12 Spare305 J5-B21

13 Spare A18 N/C

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 Reset* J2-B16, J3-B16, J4-B16

17 Spare N/C

18 GND Station ground

19 Spare N/C

20 Reserved J2-B20, J3-B20, J4-B20

21 Spare N/C

22 Reserved –

23 Reserved –

24 Reserved –

25 Reserved –

26 Reserved –

27 Reserved –

28 Reserved –

29 Carrier Detect Switch J2-B29, J3-B24, J5-B4

30 GP2 OUT WCO J2-B30, J5-B3

31 Reserved –

32 Reserved –

6-22 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-17 J1 Option1 Connector, Row C Pins

Pin # Pin Assignment To/From

1Spare A1 N/C

2 GND Station ground

35 VDC P8 pins 7, 8

4 Spare13 J2-C4, J3-A30

5Spare314 J2-C5, J5-A29

6 Reserved –

7Spare319 J2-C7, J5-A26

8 SPI CLK P7-7, J2-C8, J3-C8, J4-C8

9GND Station ground

10 OP1 CS3* J3-C10

11 Spare J2-C11, J5-A22

12 Spare N/C

13 Spare N/C

14 GND Station ground

15 14.2 VDC P8 pins 3, 4 (through F1)

16 Spare N/C

17 Spare N/C

18 Spare N/C

19 Option1 ID J3-C18

20 Reserved J2-C20, J3-C20, J4-C20

21 GND Station ground

22 Reserved –

23 Reserved –

24 Reserved –

25 Reserved –

26 Reserved –

27 Reserved –

28 Reserved –

29 AC Fail P8-5, J2-C29, J3-C24, J5-A4

30 Spare N/C

31 Reserved –

32 Reserved –

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-23

Table 6-18 P7 PA Control Connector

Pin # Pin Assignment

1Voltage Forward

2 PA Enable*

3PA Reset

4V Control

5 GND

6 PA D/A CS*

7SPI CLK

8MOSI

9MISO

10 PA A/D CS*

Table 6-19 P8 Power Supply Connector

Pin # Pin Assignment

1GND

2GND

314.2 VDC

414.2VDC

5AC Fail

6GND

75VDC

85VDC

Table 6-20 P10 Antenna Relay/PTemp+ Connector

Pin # Pin Assignment

1 GND

2GND

314.2 VDC

414.2VDC

5AC Fail

6GND

75VDC

85VDC

6-24 MTR3000 Backplane: Description

Table 6-21 J6 Terminal Block Stacking Connector

Pin # Pin Assignment

1Line 1-

2 Line 1+

3Line 2-

4 Line 2+

Table 6-22 J7 Aux Connector

#Pin Assignment Input/

Output To/From Signal Characteristics

1Tx Audio IJ3-B30, J4-A17 Transmit Audio – Nominal input level is 80 mVrms for

60% deviation with scaling factor set to 100%. 600 Ω

input impedance.

2 GPI_1 I/O J3-C32, J4-A16 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

3Aux Rx Audio OJ3-A19 Auxiliary Receiver Audio – Nominal output level is 330

mVrms with a 60% deviation receive signal. 1000 Ω

output impedance

4 GPIO_2 I/O J3-B32, J4-C18 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

5GPIO_10 I/O J3-A17, J4-B17 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

6 GPIO_9 I/O J3-A13, J4-A4 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

7Rx Audio OJ3-A30, J4-C16 Auxiliary Receiver Audio – Nominal output level is

330mVrms with a 60% deviation receive signal. 1000 Ω

output impedance.

8 GPIO_6 I/O J3-A32, J4-B19 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

9 GND

10 GPIO_7 I/O J3-C30, J4-A20 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

MTR3000 Backplane: Description 6-25

11 GPI_1* I/O J3-C32, J4-A16 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

12 GPIO_7 I/O J3-C30, J4-A20 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

13 Tx Data IJ3-B29, J4-A19 Transmit Data/PL/DPL – Nominal input level is 80 mVrms

for 20% deviation with scaling factor set to 100%. 600 Ω

input impedance.

14 Reserved – – –

15 GPIO_3 I/O J3-B31, J4-A18 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

16 GND – – –

17 GND – – –

18 GND – – –

19 GND – – –

20 Fused 14.2 VDC – – 1 Amp max

21 GPIO_8 I/O J3-C29, J4-A12 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

22 Emph Tx Audio I J3-A29, J4-B12 Emphasized Transmit Audio – Nominal input level is 80

mVrms for 60% deviation with scaling factor set to 100%.

600 Ω input impedance.

23 GPI_4 I/O J3-A31, J4-A10 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

24 GPIO_5 I/O J3-C31, J4-B10 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

25 GPIO_6 I/O J3-A32, J4-B19 Output Logic Low: 0.5 VDC max

Output Logic High: Open Collector with 10K pull-up to 5 V

Input Logic Low: 0 to 0.8 VDC

Input Logic High: 3.0 to 14 VDC

Note (*) Indicates an active low signal

Table 6-22 J7 Aux Connector (Continued)

#Pin Assignment Input/

Output To/From Signal Characteristics

6-26 MTR3000 Backplane: Basic Troubleshooting

6.2 Basic Troubleshooting

6.2.1 Replacement Procedure

For procedure to replace the Backplane Interface Board, refer to Section 14.7.2.8 on page 14-12.

6.2.2 Fuse Check and Replacement Procedure

6.2.2.1 14.2 VDC Internal and 14.2 VDC Accessory

This section illustrates the procedure to verify that the two 14.2 VDC backplane interface board fuses

are in working condition. Fuse F1 (refer to Figure 6-3) protects the 14.2 VDC supply to the SCM, the

Wireline Module and the Auxiliary I/O Module. Fuse F2 (refer to Figure 6-3) protects the 14.2 VDC

supply to the J5 System Connector and J7 Aux Connector.

To check the fuse for failure, perform the following steps:

1. Turn off the base station/repeater power at source (e.g. AC breaker).

2. Remove the fuse cover plate located on the backplane interface board shield by unscrewing

one M4 screw. See Figure 6-3 for the location of the fuses.

3. Turn on base station/repeater power at source (e.g. AC breaker).

4. Measure the voltage at both terminals of Fuse 1 and Fuse 2. Ground one probe of the

Voltmeter to the chassis or other convenient ground. Use the other probe of the Voltmeter to

measure the voltage at both terminals of Fuse 1 and Fuse 2. In all four measurements, the

voltage should be 14.2 VDC +/-3%.

5. If a voltage is present on one terminal of the fuse but not the other one, replace the fuse as it

is most likely the result of a blown fuse.

6. Replace the fuse cover plate and secure in place with the M4 screw.

For procedure to check the fuses for the two 14.2 VDC (F1 and F2), refer to Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Rear view with fuse cover plate removed

To avoid electrical shock, turn off base station/repeater power at

source (e.g. AC breaker) before replacing any fuses.

W A R N I N G

Fuse F1 and Fuse F2

MTR3000 Backplane: Basic Troubleshooting 6-27

To replace the fuse for failure, perform the following steps:

1. Turn off the base station/repeater power at source (e.g. AC breaker).

2. Remove fuse cover plate located on the backplane interface board shield by unscrewing one

M4 screw.

3. Pull defective fuse carefully with a pair of small needle nose pliers.

4. Replace new fuse (6583049X16) carefully with a pair of small needle nose pliers.

5. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

For continued protection of the base station/repeater against risk of fire,

replace the fuse only with the same type and rating of fuse.

C a u t i o n

Notes

6-28 MTR3000 Backplane: Basic Troubleshooting

Chapter 7 MTR3000 Power Supply

7.1 Description

The Power Supply is described in this section. A general description, identification of inputs and

outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are provided. The information

provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module, allowing

maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. (Refer to "Chapter 14" for detailed removal or

installation procedures for all modules in the base station/repeater.)

The Power Supply has built in power factor correction and includes a connection for battery backup

that also serves as the DC input when the supply is used in DC only input mode.

7.1.1 General Description

The Power Supply accepts an AC or a DC input (AC input = 85 to 264 VAC,

50/60 Hz, DC input = 21.6 to 32 VDC) and generates three output DC voltages to power the base

station/repeater modules: +28.6 VDC, +14.2 VDC and +5.1 VDC.

The Power Supply is a high-frequency switched mode design, all contained in a metal heat-sink,

mounted on the left-hand side of the base station/repeater. The design provides for output over-

voltage/over-current protection.

The AC input connection is made at the rear of the base station/repeater via an IEC-type connector

keyed to accept only high temperature type mating connectors. Also provided is a Battery Backup

connection (see DC mode above). Power supply cooling, when necessary, is provided by an external

fan (located near the middle of the heatsink) which provides forced air across the power supply

heatsink fins.

Note When used in DC input mode, the 28.6 VDC output equals the DC input within 0–0.5 VDC.

Note An external 24 V (nominal) battery system is required to support the battery backup feature

so that when the AC power fails, the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater (BR) can be powered

from a DC battery source if it is connected to the PS. This results in uninterrupted radio

service (for as long as battery power can be provided). As the PS does not have a battery

charging function, when the AC power is restored, an external charger is required to

recharge the battery.

7-2 MTR3000 Power Supply: Description

7.1.1.1 Identification of Inputs/Outputs

Figure 7-1 shows the Power Supply input and output external connections.

Figure 7-1 Power Supply Input/Output Connections

Outside View

Inside View

Front

Back

Front

Back

DC Output to

the Backplane

Interface Board

DC Output To PA

AC Power

Connector

DC Input

MTR3000 Power Supply: Specifications 7-3

7.2 Specifications

Table 7-1 and Table 7-2 shows the electrical performance specifications for the Power Supply.

Table 7-1 Power Supply AC Performance Specifications

Parameter Value or Range

Input Voltage Range 85 VAC to 264 VAC

Input Frequency Range 47–63 Hz

Steady State Output Voltage 28.6 V @ 13 A,

14.2 V @ 8 A,

5.1 V @ 2 A

Output Power (Rated) 500 W

Output Ripple:

+28.6 VDC

+14.2 VDC

+5.1 VDC

50 mV p-p, @ 25°C (77°F)

100 mV p-p, @ 25°C (77°F)

Table 7-2 Power Supply DC Performance Specifications

Parameter Value or Range

Input Voltage Range 21.6–32 VDC

Steady State Output Voltage 28.6 V @ 13 A, Input voltage dependent

14.2 V @ 8 A, Regulated

5.1 V @ 2 A, Regulated

Output Power (Rated) 500 W

Output Ripple:

+28.6 VDC

+14.2 VDC

+5.1 VDC

Input voltage dependent (0–0.5 V below input)

50 mV p-p, @ 25°C (77°F)

100 mV p-p, @ 25°C (77°F)

7-4 MTR3000 Power Supply: Functional Theory Of Operation

7.3 Functional Theory Of Operation

The following theory of operation describes the operation of the power supply circuitry at a functional

level. The information is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the

functions performed by the module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the

module level. Refer to Figure 7-2 for the block diagram of the power supply.

7.3.1 Supply Circuitry

7.3.1.1 Output Over-Current Protection

An over-current condition on either the 28.6 VDC, 14.2 VDC or 5.1 VDC outputs will shut down the

total supply and try to restart. If the over-current continues to exist, the power supply will ‘hiccup’ until

the overload condition is removed, and will not be damaged by the overload. The power supply

recovers automatically after the removal of the overload condition.

7.3.1.2 Over-Voltage Detection and Shutdown

All DC output for either AC or DC inputs are protected from continuous over-voltages by detection

circuits which shutdown the supply and then try to restart itself. If the over-voltage condition

continues to occur, the power supply intermittently shut down and will try to restart. If the over-

voltage condition is removed, the supply automatically recovers. In addition, the 14.2 VDC and the

5.1 VDC outputs are protected by crowbar circuits to limit peak overvoltage.

7.3.1.3 AC Fail Detect

An AC Fail detect signal is provided to indicate (when used with battery backup option) that the

power supply is operating from an external DC source rather than the ac mains. This signal is a TTL

compatible output capable of sinking 1 mA with 10 kΩ pull-up to 5.1 VDC, and is routed to the Station

Control Module. The active-low state indicates ac operation. For the nominal 120 VAC operation, the

signal is active-high (indicating an AC mains failure) when the AC voltage is less than 85 Vrms, but

more than the minimum voltage that guarantees that all outputs will be in regulation at full load.

7.3.1.4 Fan Control

The supply incorporates temperature sense/fan enable circuitry for controlling a 12 VDC fan

mounted on the surface of the heatsink assembly. The power supply circuitry senses the internal

temperature of the power supply. When the internal temperature exceeds a set limit, +12 V is

enabled at J1–1 to turn on the fan. The +12 V fan supply is derived from the +14.2 V output. Power

to the fan is off when the temperature is below the set limit. The fan turns for approximately 5

seconds when power is first applied as a diagnostic indicator that the fan is functional.

7.3.1.5 Over-temperature Protection

The power supply will turn off all outputs when the external temperature exceeds approximately

75°C with the PA operating at full power. The power supply will restart when the internal operating

temperature is reduced below the set point.

Note To disable the AC Fail Detect alarm in cases where the base station/repeater is running on

DC only input, refer to the Online Help section in the CPS tool.

Note For procedure to replace the PS fan, refer to Section 14.7.2.1 on page 14-6.

MTR3000 Power Supply 7-5

Figure 7-2 Power Supply Functional Block Diagram

THERMAL

SENSOR

FAN

CONTROL

FILTER

CHOKE

DC INPUT

(21.6 – 32 VDC)

14.2 VDC

I/P SWITCH WITH REVERSE POLARITY

PROTECTION CIRCUIT

AUXILIARY

POWER

SUPPLY

CROWBAR

CIRCUIT

PFC

CIRCUIT

FORWARD

CONVERTER

GROUND

28.6 VDC

BATT NEG

BATT POS

TO PA

MODULE

5.1 VDC

14.2 VDC

GROUND

BACKPLANE

INTERFACE

BOARD

TO FAN

AC FAIL

BRIDGE RECTIFIER

AND INRUSH

EMI

FILTER

AC MAINS INPUT

(85 – 264 VAC,

50/60 Hz)

DRV

BULK +

SVCC

PVCC

+28.6VP

STEP-DOWN

BULK CONVERTER

+14.2VP

OUTPUT FILTER /

OVERV, I SENSE

OUTPUT FILTER /

OVERV, I SENSE

STEP-DOWN

BULK CONVERTER OUTPUT FILTER /

OVERV, I SENSE

CROWBAR

CIRCUIT

PWM

CONTROLLER

PWM

CONTROLLER

SYNC

HOUSEKEEPING

CIRCUIT

OFF LS

THERMAL

SENSOR

DRV

THERMAL

SENSOR

PWM CONTROLLER &

GATE DRIVE CIRCUIT

SYNC, OFF

FAULT 1

FAULT 2

FAULT 3

(OFF or HICCUP) FAULT 1, 2, 3

7-6 MTR3000 Power Supply

Notes

MTR3000 Power Supply: Basic Troubleshooting 7-7

7.4 Basic Troubleshooting

7.4.1 Replacement Procedure

For procedure to replace the Power Supply module, refer to Section 14.7.2.3 on page 14-8.

7.4.2 Basic Voltage Check Procedure

This section is to illustrate measurement of the 28.6 VDC, 14.2 VDC, and 5.1 VDC sources if a

known good AC or DC source is applied to the Power Supply but there is no apparent activity from

the base station/repeater.

To check the basic voltage for base station/repeater failure, such as no power indicated to the base

station/repeater when the AC and DC mains are connected, perform the following steps:

1. Turn on the base station/repeater power at source (e.g. AC or DC breaker).

2. Push a voltmeter probe into the power connector at the backplane interface board or PA

adjacent to the indicated wires. Ensure enough of the probe tip is inserted to touch the metal

Pin inside the connector housing.

3. Touch the other voltmeter probe anywhere on the chassis (or either casting) to complete the

measurement circuit.

To measure the 14.2 VDC and 5.1 VDC, refer to Figure 7-3. For the pin-out, refer to Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-3 Measuring 14.2 VDC and 5.1 VDC (other voltmeter probe to chassis)

Figure 7-4 Pin-out of connector (measuring 14.2 VDC and 5.1 VDC)

14.2VDC (either blue wire)

5.1VDC (either red-white wire)

14.2 VDC (blue wires)

5.1 VDC (red-white wires)

7-8 MTR3000 Power Supply: Basic Troubleshooting

To measure the 14.2 VDC and 28.6 VDC, refer to Figure 7-5 For the pin-out, refer to Figure 7-6

Figure 7-5 Measuring 14.2 VDC and 28.6 VDC (other voltmeter probe to chassis)

Figure 7-6 Pin-out of connector (measuring 14.2 VDC and 28.6 VDC)

28.6 VDC (either red wire)

14.2 VDC (either blue wire)

14.2 VDC (blue wires) 28.6 VDC (red wires)

Chapter 8 MTR3000 Wireline

8.1 Description

The Wireline Interface Board is described in this section. A general description, identification of

inputs and outputs, a functional block diagram, and functional theory of operation are provided. The

information provided is sufficient to give service personnel a functional understanding of the module,

allowing maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level.

8.1.1 General Description

The MTR3000 Wireline board is used to connect an analog audio source and sink (such as a

console) to the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater. The Wireline board supports Tone and DC Remote

Control modes that allow for channel selection and PTT signaling from compatible consoles. Local

PTT operation is also supported. The Wireline can be configured for either 2-wire or 4-wire operation

as needed.

Although the Wireline is installed as a card inside the MTR 3000 Base Station/Repeater, its operation

is similar to an External Tone Remote or a DC Remote Adapter. The Wireline board drives the same

GPIO signals that an external controller would drive if it were connected to the J7 DB-25 connector

on the back of the base station/repeater. Despite the similarities with an external controller, almost all

Wireline options are configured through the CPS and Tuner software configuration tools, just as the

other base station/repeater options are.

8-2 MTR3000 Wireline: Description

8.1.1.1 Input and Output Connections

Figure 8-1 shows the location of the Wireline board jumpers and all input and output external

connections.

Figure 8-1 Wireline Board Jumpers and Input/Output Connections

Mates with Backplane

Interface Board

Jumpers

MTR3000 Wireline: Specifications 8-3

8.2 Specifications

Table 8-1 shows the specifications of MTR3000 Wireline board.

8.3 Functional Theory Of Operation

The following theory of operation describes the Wireline board at a functional level. The information

is presented to give the service technician a basic understanding of the functions performed by the

module in order to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting to the module level. Refer to

Figure 8-5 for the block diagram of the Wireline board.

8.3.1 Functional Overview

8.3.1.1 FPGA

The MTR 3000 Wireline board uses Digital Signal Processing (DSP) techniques to implement all

required remote control functions, filtering algorithms, and audio adjustments. Audio enters and

leaves the board as analog, but is converted to digital in the interim for processing.

The FPGA is responsible for handling all audio processing functions. It accepts digital audio data

from the CODEC, applies the required filters and algorithms, and sends the resulting audio samples

back to the CODEC to be converted back to analog. In addition to its audio processing functions, the

FPGA also manages CODEC configuration, generates the CODEC master clock, drives and

interprets backplane interface board GPIO signals, interprets decoded DC Remote Control signals,

and services configuration requests from the Station Control Board via the backplane interface board

SPI interface.

8.3.1.2 CODEC

The Digital-to-Analog and Analog-to-Digital conversions for both the Tx and Rx paths are handled by

a single stereo CODEC. The CODEC converts analog audio to digital samples which are sent to the

FPGA for further processing. The FPGA will then return modified digital samples to the CODEC to be

converted back to analog.

The CODEC is configured by the FPGA via an I2C interface. The FPGA synthesizes the CODEC

master clock from the board’s on-board oscillator. In return, the CODEC will generate the bit clock

and word clock used to transfer digital audio data between the CODEC and FPGA.

Two-wire and Four-wire Tx audio use different analog input pins on the CODEC. The CODEC will

select the appropriate input based on the “Wire Mode” setting in the CPS tool. When operating in

4-wire mode, the 2-wire Tx audio path is automatically disconnected from the CODEC input using an

analog switch. This helps to reduce crosstalk and improve audio performance.

Table 8-1 Specifications of Wireline board

Parameter Specification

Wireline Transmit Level +10 to -30 dBm

Wireline Receive Level +7 to -30 dBm

Return Loss > 20 dB

Distortion Introduced < 0.5%

8-4 MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation

8.3.1.3 DC Control Decoder

The DC Control Decoder uses a collection of optocouplers and diodes to detect the amplitude and

polarity of DC currents on the Wireline Tx pair. The optocouplers provide a set of logic signals to the

FPGA that are used when the Wireline board is configured for DC Remote Control operation.

8.3.1.4 Surge Protection

The MTR3000 Wireline board implements 3 stages of surge protection on its Wireline port. In the first

stage of protection, sidactors limit the instantaneous voltage at the beginning of a transient event by

shunting current between voltage potentials. In the second stage of protection, Positive Temperature

Coefficient (PTC) fuses disconnect the Wireline Tx and Rx paths from the base station/repeater

backplane interface board when the transient current exceeds specified levels. In the third stage of

protection, transient voltage suppression diodes will clamp line-to-line events that exceed 9V.

8.3.1.5 Impedance Matching Network

The impedance matching network is intended to present a known configurable impedance to

equipment connected at the far side of the Wireline cable. Line impedance is generally standardized

by country or region. The matching network uses 24 analog switches to switch resistors and

capacitors onto the receive and transmit audio paths. For any given impedance setting, 3 switches

are closed. On the receive pair, impedances are switched in series with each line and on the transmit

path impedances are switched in parallel. The line impedance setting is configured using the CPS

software configuration tool. The Wireline’s FPGA will close the correct switches based on the CPS

configuration setting.

Table 8-2 shows the line impedance supported by the Wireline board based on the country or region.

Note The PTC fuses are designed to automatically reset when line conditions return to normal. All

surge protection components (including the PTC fuses) are not intended to be field

serviceable.

Table 8-2 Impedance supported by Wireline board

Option Functionality

High Impedance For use with an external impedance matching

600 ΩFor Argentina, Canada, Chile, Columbia, Ecuador, El

Salvador, Guam, Hong Kong, India, Indonesia, Japan,

Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kuwait, Macao, Malaysia, Mexico,

Oman, Pakistan, Peru, Philippines, Russia, Saudi Ara-

bia, Singapore, South Korea, Taiwan, Thailand, UAE,

USA and Yemen

270 Ω + (150 nF || 750 Ω) For Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France, Ger-

many, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg,

Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Swit-

zerland, Bahrain, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic,

Egypt, Hungary, Israel, Latvia, Lebanon, Malta,

Morocco, Nigeria, Poland, Romania, Slovakia and Slo-

venia

220 Ω + (115 nF || 820 Ω) For Australia, Bulgaria and South Africa

370 Ω + (310 nF || 620 Ω) For New Zealand

MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation 8-5

8.3.1.6 Backplane SPI Bus

The backplane SPI interface is used as the primary communication link between the Station Control

Board and the Wireline board. This interface is used for configuring and upgrading the Wireline

board.

8.3.1.7 GPIO Signals

The GPIO signals comprise both input and output signals that the Wireline FPGA uses to

communicate control information with the Station Control Module. Inputs to the Wireline board inform

the Wireline FPGA when an RF carrier has been detected or a PL tone has been decoded. Output

signals from the Wireline board are used to select the base station/repeater transmit frequency and

activate the alternate CPS defined GPIO functions. These signals are generally activated in

response to decoded DC currents or tone sequences. The PTT GPIO signal functions as both an

input and an output. When used as an output, the signal will key up the base station/repeater’s

transmitter. When a backplane PTT condition is present, but not driven by the Wireline board, the

signal may function as an input. This allows the Wireline to switch the direction of audio when

configured for 2-wire half-duplex with no remote control.

900 ΩFor Brazil

320 Ω + (230 nF || 1050 Ω) For United Kingdom

200 Ω + (100 nF || 680 Ω) For China

900 Ω || 30 nF For legacy MTR2000

Table 8-2 Impedance supported by Wireline board (Continued)

Option Functionality

8-6 MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation

8.3.2 Board Configuration

There is only one option on the Wireline board that must be configured through jumpers. All other

configuration settings are modified using the Customer Programming Software (CPS).

8.3.2.1 Jumper Configuration

When operating the Wireline board in DC Remote Control mode, the jumpers on header P8 must be

set. These jumpers route DC Control currents from the correct Wireline pair to the DC Remote

Decoder.

Table 8-3 shows the jumper configuration while Figure 8-1 shows the location of jumpers on the P8

connector for the Wireline Interface Board.

Note For maximum audio performance, the jumpers should be removed when operating in Tone

Remote Control or no remote control mode.

Table 8-3 Wireline Board Jumper Settings

Header P8

No DC Remote No jumpers installed

2-Wire DC Remote Jumper pins : 5 to 6, 7 to 8

4-Wire DC Remote Jumper pins : 1 to 2, 3 to 4

Figure 8-2 Location of jumpers on the P8 connector

Jumpers

Top (from left to right):

7, 5, 3, 1

Bottom (from left to right)

8, 6, 4, 2

MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation 8-7

8.3.2.2 CPS configuration

This section describes how to set up the Wireline board using the Customer Programming Software

(CPS) tool. Ensure that the Wireline board is properly installed in the base station/repeater and that

the CPS software is configured for “Expert View” before proceeding.

Configure the settings in CPS to match the appropriate table. Under the “Accessories” menu, select

the “De & Pre” option under “Analog Accessory Emphasis”. For “Audio type”, select the “Rx & Tx

Filtered Squelch” option. Refer to Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3 Choosing Remote Control Mode in CPS

8-8 MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation

All Wireline options appear under the “Accessories” menu of the CPS software, as shown in the

screenshot below.

Figure 8-4 CPS configuration for Wireline board

8.3.2.2.1 Choosing a Remote Control Mode

The first step in configuring the Wireline board in CPS is to choose a remote control mode. Select the

appropriate mode from the “Remote Control Mode” option in the CPS Wireline configuration menu.

For Tone Remote Control with 7 channels or less, choose TRC7. For Tone Remote Control with 8 to

15 channels, choose TRC15. For DC Remote Control, choose DC. If PTT is generated by a device

other than the Wireline board (commonly known as Local PTT), choose ‘None’.

With a Remote Control Mode chosen, the “GPIO Physical Pins” must be configured to match. Locate

the “GPIO Physical Pins” settings in CPS on the “Accessories” menu. Table 8-4, Table 8-5, and

Table 8-6 list the “GPIO Physical Pins” settings for each Remote Control Mode.

MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation 8-9

TRC7 supports the use of alternate CPS defined GPIO functions on Pin 5 and Pin 21. Select the

desired function from the feature list or choose ‘Unassigned’ if no functionality is desired.

Note The “User Defined” functions in Table 8-5 (i.e. the functions on Pin 5 and Pin 21) will not

support the “Enable/Disable” and “Tx Power Level High” functions.

Figure 8-5 GPIO Physical Pin Configuration in CPS (example shown above is for TRC15)

8-10 MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation

Table 8-4 CPS mapping table (TRC15)

J7 DB25 Pin No. CPS GPIO Physical

Pins Feature Setting MTR3000 Signal

2, 11 External PTT GPI_1

8, 25 Channel Select 2 GPIO_6

10, 12 Channel Select 3 GPIO_7

21 Channel Select 4 GPIO_8

23 Monitor GPI_4

24 Channel Select 1 GPIO_5

Table 8-5 CPS mapping table (TRC7)

J7 DB25 Pin No. CPS GPIO Physical

Pins Feature Setting MTR3000 Signal

2, 11 External PTT GPI_1

5 User Defined (Alternate

CPS defined GPIO

functions)

GPIO_10

8, 25 Channel Select 2 GPIO_6

10, 12 Channel Select 3 GPIO_7

21 User Defined (Alternate

CPS defined GPIO

functions)

GPIO_8

23 Monitor GPI_4

24 Channel Select 1 GPIO_5

Table 8-6 CPS mapping table (DC Remote)

J7 DB25 Pin No. CPS GPIO Physical

Pins Feature Setting MTR3000 Signal

2, 11 External PTT GPI_1

8, 25 Channel Select 2 GPIO_6

10, 12 Channel Select 3 GPIO_7

21 Unassigned GPIO_8

23 Monitor GPI_4

24 Channel Select 1 GPIO_5

MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation 8-11

8.3.2.2.2 Other Wireline Configuration Options

All remaining Wireline configuration options may be set per Table 8-7.

Table 8-7 Wireline CPS definitions

CPS Function Description

WL Line Impedance This field sets the Wireline Rx audio (output) and Tx audio (input)

impedance of the Wireline board. The impedance of the Wireline board

must be set to match that of the backhaul interface.

WL 2 W/4 W Mode This field sets the Wireline interface for either 2-wire mode (half-duplex), or

the 4-wire mode (full-duplex) operation.

• In 2-wire mode, the console audio to and from the base station/repeater

will share a single pair of conductors. The MTR3000 Base Station/

Repeater will connect to Line 2 of the J6 backplane interface board

connector.

• In 4-wire mode, the console will use two separate pairs of wires for

transmit and receive audio. Tx audio (from the console) will connect to

J6 Line 1. Rx audio (from the base station/repeater) will connect to J6

Line 2.

WL Remote Control Mode Refer to Section 8.3.2.2.1 on page 8-8.

This field sets the type of remote control method that the Wireline will use

to decode the function signals from the console.

There are four options: Tone Remote 7 (TRC7), Tone Remote 15 (TRC15),

Direct Current Remote (DC), and None.

• TRC7: Allows seven different channels to be selected, as well as the

monitor function and three alternate CPS defined GPIO functions.

• TRC15: Allows 15 different channels to be selected, as well as the mon-

itor function.

• DC: Allows 5 different channels to selected, as well as the monitor func-

tion.

• None: Disables all remote control functions, though the transmit and

receive audio paths are still supported via the Wireline. If "Local PTT" is

used in 2-Wire mode (half duplex), this parameter must be set to "None"

to allow the backplane PTT signal to control the direction of audio.

WL Squelch Hysteresis This field determines how much the level of transmit audio must drop below

the squelch threshold before the squelch closes. Likewise, this parameter

also indicates how much the level of transmit audio must rise above the

squelch threshold before the squelch opens. This parameter aids in

minimizing squelch chatter.

WL Tx Guard Tone This field sets the guard tone frequency detector and notch on the transit

path of the Wireline. When 2-wire or 4-wire tone remote control is desired

(TRC7 or TRC15), the Wireline guard tone frequency must be set to the

same guard tone frequency generated by the console. If tone remote

control is not used, then set the guard tone frequency to "disabled" for full

spectrum audio.

8-12 MTR3000 Wireline: Functional Theory Of Operation

WL HLGT ALC Mode This field, if enabled, automatically adjusts the transmit audio up to

-4/+6dB to compensate for changes in the line levels. This adjustment is

made when high level guard tone (HLGT) is detected. As such, the ALC

cannot be used with the DC Remote Control or no remote control modes.

WL Monitor Mode This field defines the behavior of the Monitor function as either latching or

momentary. When set to latching, the base station/repeater receiver’s

squelch is opened until the next High Level Guard Tone (HLGT) is sent via

the console. When set to momentary, the base station/repeater receiver’s

squelch is opened for four seconds.

WL PTT Dropout Timer This field specifies the allowed hold over time after the loss of low level

guard tone (LLGT) before the base station/repeater dekeys. This

parameter allows for momentary LLGT loss without dekeying the base

station/repeater. LLGT is a tone generated by the console or deskset which

signals the Wireline to issue a push to talk (PTT) to the base station/

repeater.

WL Revert Channel This field selects the revert channel of the base station/repeater. The revert

channel is the channel that the base station/repeater will return to after a

call is completed. If the revert channel is set to "no revert", then after the

call is complete, the base station/repeater will remain on the channel of the

completed call.

Table 8-7 Wireline CPS definitions (Continued)

CPS Function Description

MTR3000 Wireline 8-13

Figure 8-5 Wireline Functional Block Diagram

Surge

Protection

Surge

Protection

Remote

Decoder

Jumpers

Audio

TX Audio

(2-Wire TX/RX)

Decoded DC

Control Signals

(to FPGA)

Impedance

Matching

Network

Impedance

Matching

Network

D/A

A/D

CODEC

FPGA

...

Wireline

CODEC

D/A

A/D

RX Audio

from Control Board

and J7 DB25

TX Audio

to Control Board

and J7 DB25

SPI BusTo/From

Control Board

GPIO Signals

To/From

Control Board

and J7 DB25

Decoded DC

Control Signals

Line 2

Line 1

Select 2W/4W

Station Backplane (J4)

8-14 MTR3000 Wireline

Notes

MTR3000 Wireline: Basic Troubleshooting 8-15

8.4 Basic Troubleshooting

8.4.1 LEDs

The Wireline LEDs can be used for basic troubleshooting and to identify faults on the Wireline board.

If the power LED is on and the alarm LED is red, the Wireline board is faulty and needs to be

repaired or replaced in its entirety. The procedure to replace the Wireline board can be found in

Section 14.7.2.9 on page 14-14.

Note A MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Upgrade will only support the MTR3000 wireline card if the

backplane interface board is replaced by model DLN6721.

Table 8-8 Wireline LED Indicators

LED Function Name Reference

Designator LED Color Status Indication

Power/FPGA Configured D10 Green Power present and FPGA

configured

PTT D1 Green Wireline board is driving

backplane PTT signal

Rx Squelch Qualifier *D2 Green Always on

Repeater Fallback Active*D3 Red Always off

HLGT Detect (High Level

Guard Tone Detect)

D7 Green Wireline board has detected the

presence of a tone on the Tx path

that meets the amplitude and

frequency requirements for High

Level Guard Tone (HLGT)

LLGT Detect (Low Level

Guard Tone Detect)

D8 Green Wireline board has detected the

presence of a tone on the Tx path

that meets the amplitude and

frequency requirements for Low

Level Guard Tone (LLGT)

Alarm D9 Green Wireline board operating normally

Red A fault has been detected on the

Wireline board

Note (*) Not supported.

8-16 MTR3000 Wireline: Basic Troubleshooting

Figure 8-6 Location of LEDs

From Left to Right :

PTT, Rx Squelch

Qualifier, Repeater

Fallback Active

From Left to Right :

HLGT Detect,

LLGT Detect, Alarm

Power/FPGA

Configured

MTR3000 Wireline: Basic Troubleshooting 8-17

8.4.2 Tone Remote Control

A tone sequence must meet specific requirements for timing, amplitude, and frequency to be

considered valid. The timing requirements for a tone sequence are defined in Figure 8-7. All tone

sequences must include a minimum of 120 mS of high level guard tone and 40 mS of function tone.

i.e. Function tone is required (even on single frequency systems).

Low Level Guard Tone (LLGT) is not required. This allows the console to change frequencies or

manipulate alternate CPS defined GPIO functions without keying up the base station/repeater. When

Low Level Guard Tone is present (at the end of a tone sequence), the base station/repeater will key

up and remain transmitting for as long as LLGT is present.

Figure 8-7 Timing requirements for a Valid Tone Remote Control Sequence

The required amplitude for HLGT in absolute terms is determined by the Wireline Tx Level alignment

process. Refer to Section 13.5.4 on page 13-10. HLGT is expected to be 6 dB above the Test Tone

level used in the alignment process. Function Tone is expected to be 4 dB below the Test Tone Level

and LLGT is expected to be 24 dB below the Test Tone level. Refer to Figure 8-8. The HLGT Detect

and LLGT Detect LEDs on the front of the board may be used to determine if the Wireline is

detecting the proper levels.

High Level Guard Tone

(HLGT)

120mS

Function

Tone

40mS

Low Level Guard Tone (LLGT)

Variable

Mixed with Speech

(Optional)

8-18 MTR3000 Wireline: Basic Troubleshooting

Figure 8-8 Valid amplitudes for Tone Remote Control signaling

HLGT(adjustable -30dBm -> +10dBm)

0 dB

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-21

-24

-27

-30

-33

-36

-39

Test Tone / 60% RSD / Average Voice @ -6dB

4.4dB

100% RSD @ -1.6dB

6dB

-4dB

-24dB

Valid

Function

Tone

Nominal -10dB

Valid

LLGT

Nominal -30dB

Valid

HLGT

Nominal 0dB

Level Relative to HLGT (dB)

MTR3000 Wireline: Basic Troubleshooting 8-19

All tones must be within +/- 10 Hz of the nominal expected frequency for guaranteed detection. The

tone plans for TRC7 and TRC15 are listed in Table 8-9 and Table 8-10 for console configuration.

Note When configured for TRC7 operation there are 2 function tones that are not used. If a

console sends these function tones to the Wireline as part of an otherwise valid tone

sequence, the Wireline will key up the base station/repeater on the frequency associated

with the last valid channel steering function tone received.

Table 8-9 Function Tone Definition Table (Console) (TRC15)

Tone (Hz) Function

2050 Monitor

1950 Frequency 1

1850 Frequency 2

1750 Frequency 3

1650 Frequency 4

1550 Frequency 5

1450 Frequency 6

1350 Frequency 7

1250 Frequency 8

1150 Frequency 9

1050 Frequency 10

950 Frequency 11

850 Frequency 12

750 Frequency 13

650 Frequency 14

550 Frequency 15

8-20 MTR3000 Wireline: Basic Troubleshooting

8.4.3 DC Remote Control

The signaling plan for DC Remote Control is shown in Table 8-11 for console configuration. Ensure

that the DC Remote Control routing jumpers are properly configured. Refer to Section 8.3.2.1 on

page 8-6. If the base station/repeater does not key up on the expected frequency, reverse the

polarity of the wires on the Tx pair of the J6 connector on the back of the base station/repeater.

Table 8-10 Function Tone Definition Table (Console) (TRC7)

Tone (Hz) Function

2050 Monitor

1950 Frequency 1

1850 Frequency 2

1750 Frequency 3

1650 Frequency 4

1550 Frequency 5

1450 Frequency 6

1350 Frequency 7

1250 Not Used

1150 GPIO8 Assert

1050 GPIO8 De-assert

950 *GPIO9 Assert

850 *GPIO9 De-assert

750 GPIO10 Assert

650 GPIO10 De-assert

550 Not Used

Note (*) Not supported

Table 8-11 Function Tone Definition Table (Console) (TRC7)

Tone (mA) Function

-2.5 (+/- 20%) Monitor

-5.5 (+/- 20%) Frequency 3

-12 (+/- 20%) Frequency 4

2.5 (+/- 20%) Frequency 5

5.5 (+/- 20%) Frequency 1

12.5 (+/- 20%) Frequency 2

Chapter 9 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution

System (RFDS) Equipment

9.1 Description

The Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) equipment included in your system depends on

what options were purchased from Motorola. The following lists some examples of the RFDS

equipment available for your system.

9.1.1 General Description

9.1.1.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors

The preselector rejects unwanted signals including the transmitter signals from overloading the

Receiver. The filter is usually not required when using a Receiver multicoupler system. This filter can

be retuned in the field.

Figure 9-1 UHF Base Station/Repeater Preselector

RF Output RF Input

9-2 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Description

9.1.1.2 Duplexer

This optional filter provides the capability to use a single antenna for both transmitter and Receiver.

Only one transmitter and Receiver can be combined.

Figure 9-2 Duplexer (UHF)

Figure 9-3 Duplexer (800 MHz)

Note A Duplexer is required when a base station/repeater Preselector is ordered.

RF Output

RF Input

RF to/From

Antenna

RF to/from Antenna

RF Out (Rx) RF In (Tx)

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Description 9-3

9.1.1.3 External Dual Circulator Tray

An option for the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater is an External Dual Circulator module which

isolates the base station/repeater from the antenna, thus reducing the transmitter generated

intermodulation. The circulator load dissipates reflected power. It includes a cable that connects to

the RF Peripherals port on the base station/repeater backplane interface board to provide

temperature monitoring in identifying antenna problems.

Figure 9-4 External Dual Circulator Tray (UHF)

Figure 9-5 External Dual Circulator Tray (800 MHz)

Note The functionality of RF Peripherals port (temperature monitoring) is not supported.

RF Output

RF Peripherals

Port

Low Pass Filter

RF Input

Circulator Load

External Dual

Circulator

RF Output

RF Peripherals Port

RF Input

Circulator Load

External Dual Circulator

Low Pass Filter

9-4 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Description

9.1.1.4 Antenna Relay

The Antenna Relay module allows a single antenna to be used for both transmit and receive

functions (base station/repeater applications only). The Antenna Relay is controlled by a signal from

the Station Control Module to connect the antenna to either the PA (transmit) when activated/

energized or Receiver Module (receive) when deactivated/de-energized. The Antenna Relay module

is mounted on a flange provided on the rear of the PS.

Note Simplex operation (Tx=Rx) is not supported.

Note At least one (either one) of the “GPIO Physical Pins” in the “Accessories” menu of the CPS

must be configured for “Antenna Relay” before the antenna relay functionality is provided

via the P10 (ANT RELAY/PTEMP) connector port on the MTR3000 or the upgraded

MTR2000.

Note Antenna Relay functionality is provided in analog mode only.

Figure 9-6 Typical Antenna Relay Module – Inputs/Outputs

Connects to Station Transmit RF Output

(From Power Amplifier Module)

Connects to Station Receive

RF Input (To Receiver

Module or to optional

External Preselector)

Connects to Single

Transmit/Receive

Antenna

Connects With Connector

P10 on Backplane Interface

Board

Antenna Relay

Control Cable

Connects to

Peripheral Tray

(Not supported)

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Specifications 9-5

9.2 Specifications

9.2.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors

Table 9-1 shows the spec limit for the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors.

9.2.2 Duplexer

Table 9-3 shows the spec limit for Duplexer for UHF frequency band and Table 9-4 for 800/900 MHz

frequency band.

Table 9-1 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Preselector Filter Specifications

Preselector Spec Limit (UHF) Typical

Tuning Range 403 MHz–433 MHz,

435 MHz–470 MHz,

470 MHz–524 MHz

–

Bandwidth 4 MHz –

Insertion loss Table 9-2 2 dB 1.3 dB

VSWR max. 1.9:1 1.5:1

Input Connector Mini-UHF –

Output Connector Mini-UHF –

Note Refer to "Appendix A" for the model number.

Note There is no external preselector for 800/900 MHz frequency band.

Table 9-3 MTR3000 Duplexer Specifications (UHF)

Duplexer Spec

Limit Typical Notes

Frequency range 403 MHz–435 MHz,

435 MHz–470 MHz,

470 MHz–494 MHz,

494 MHz–512 MHz

– –

Insertion loss Tx 1.3 dB 1.1 dB –

Insertion loss Rx 1.3 dB 1.1 dB –

VSWR max. 1.3:1 1.2:1 –

Rx isolation

<470 MHz

>470 MHz

100 dB

–

R/T 5 MHz

R/T 3 MHz

Tx isolation

<470 MHz

>470 MHz

100 dB

–

R/T 5 MHz

R/T 3 MHz

Antenna Connector N female – –

Rx/Tx Output Connector N female – –

9-6 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Specifications

9.2.3 External Dual Circulator Tray

Table 9-5 shows the spec limit for External Dual Circulator Tray for UHF frequency band and

Table 9-6 for 800 MHz frequency band.

Table 9-4 MTR3000 Duplexer Specifications (800/900 MHz)

Duplexer Spec

Limit Typical Notes

Frequency range 806 MHz–870 MHz – –

Insertion loss Tx 1.0 dB 0.8 dB –

Insertion loss Rx 1.0 dB 0.8 dB –

VSWR max. ≤ 1.5:1 1.3:1 –

Rx isolation 80 dB – –

Tx isolation 80 dB – –

Antenna Connector QN – –

Rx/Tx Output Connector QN – –

Note Refer to "Appendix A" for the model number.

Table 9-5 MTR3000 External Dual Circulator Specifications (UHF)

External Dual Circulator Spec Limit Typical

Operating Frequency Range 403–435 MHz,

435–470 MHz,

470–524 MHz

–

Insertion Loss 1.6 dB 1.2 dB

Input Return Loss 18 dB 24 dB

Reverse Isolation 40 dB 50 dB

Power (continuous) 200 W –

Harmonic Attenuation <10 GHz 70 dB (Typical: 80 dB) –

Input Connector RF cable with N male –

Output Connector N female –

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Specifications 9-7

9.2.4 Antenna Relay

Table 9-7 shows the spec limit for Antenna Relay.

Table 9-6 MTR3000 External Dual Circulator Specifications (800 MHz)

External Dual Circulator Spec Limit Typical

Operating Frequency Range 762–870 MHz –

Insertion Loss 1.6 dB 1.2 dB

Input Return Loss 18 dB –

Reverse Isolation 40 dB 42 dB

Power (continuous) 200 W –

Harmonic Attenuation 60 dB –

Intermodulation (2 tone, 100 W

each)

-75 dBc –

Input Connector RF cable with N male –

Output Connector N female –

Note Refer to "Appendix A" for the model number.

Table 9-7 MTR3000 Antenna Relay Specifications

Antenna Relay Spec Limit

Operating Frequency DC to 4 GHz @ 20°C

Maximum Input Power 500 W @ 1 GHz

Coil Specifications:

Pull-in voltage

Drop-out voltage

Resistance

10.0 VDC minimum

2.0 VDC maximum

100 Ω±10% @ 20°C

Contact Specifications:

Type

Actuation

Pull-in time

Drop-out time (Includes remake of NC contact)

SPDT

Fail-safe (Break before make)

20 ms maximum @ 20°C

Insertion Loss 0.3 dB maximum

Isolation 70 dB minimum

VSWR Maximum 1.3:1

Temperature Range -30°C to +80°C

9-8 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Functional Theory of Operation

9.3 Functional Theory of Operation

9.3.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors

The Preselector rejects unwanted signals including the transmitter signals from overloading the

Receiver. The filter is usually not required when using a Receiver multicoupler system. This filter can

be retuned in the field.

9.3.2 Antenna Relay

The Antenna Relay Module contains a relay with a set of normally open and normally closed

contacts. The relay coil is controlled by the Antenna Relay signal from the Station Control Module to

connect either the Receiver Module or the PA to a single transmit/receive antenna.

9.3.3 External Dual Circulator Tray

The double circulator assembly accepts transmit RF output power from the PA and provides 45 dB of

isolation between the PA and the transmit antenna. The assembly consists of two circulators in a

single case, each with a 50 Ω load. Each circulator allows forward RF energy to pass through to the

output, while routing any reflected RF energy to the corresponding 50 Ω load.

Most of the reflected energy is absorbed by the 50 Ω load (heat sink) mounted connected to the

second circulator. A thermistor mounted on the heat sink provides a variable resistance signal

proportional to the heat sink temperature. This signal is routed to the Station Control Module via the

Temp Sense cable and the backplane interface board. If the heat sink temperature exceeds a preset

threshold, the base station/repeater software enables PA rollback mode to a reduced output power.

Terminations Female N-Type

Input and Output Impedance 50 Ω

Note Refer to "Appendix A" for the model number.

Set the “Antenna Relay Delay Timer” minimally to 50 ms in the

Customer Programming Software (CPS) to ensure that the Antenna

Relay is physically in proper position during transmitter key-up.

Damage to the antenna relay will result if a value less than 50 ms is

entered into the CPS.

Note With the relay de-energized, the antenna is connected to the Receiver Module. To connect

the antenna to the PA, the Station Control Module must energize the relay (one side of

which is connected to +14.2 VDC) by grounding the Antenna Relay signal.

Note The functionality of RF Peripherals port (temperature monitoring) is not supported.

Table 9-7 MTR3000 Antenna Relay Specifications (Continued)

Antenna Relay Spec Limit

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Basic Troubleshooting 9-9

9.3.4 Duplexer

The duplexer module allows a transmit and receive channel pair to share a common Tx/Rx antenna.

Each duplexer module consists of six resonant cavities (three for transmit and three for receive)

contained in a temperature-compensated copper enclosure designed to mount in a standard EIA

48.26 cm (19") equipment rack. Each set of three cavities is designed and tuned to pass the

respective transmit or receive channel frequency (or bandwidths) while providing maximum Tx noise

suppression at the Rx frequency and maximum Rx isolation at the Tx frequency.

9.4 Basic Troubleshooting

9.4.1 Replacement Procedure

9.4.1.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors

1. Wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD) strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground.

This strap must be worn throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components.

2. Turn off the DC breaker, and/or pull the AC source power cord from the back of the base

station/repeater.

3. Remove the base station/repeater preselector from the base station/repeater, as follows:

a. Remove the two screws which secure the base station/repeater preselector to the flange of

the base station/repeater using a Torque Driver T30 bit.

b. Label and disconnect the left and right coaxial cable mini-U connection (Male type) from the

front of the base station/repeater preselector.

4. Install the base station/repeater preselect to the base station/repeater, as follows:

a. Secure the preselector housing to the base station/repeater flange using the two screws

which were previously removed.

b. Reconnect the left and right coaxial cable mini-U connection (Male type) to the base station/

repeater preselector.

9.4.1.2 Duplexer

1. Wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good

ground. This strap must be worn throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any

components.

2. Disable the channel that is using the base station/repeater in the system with the duplexer

module which will be replaced.

Note For the correct procedure in handling static-sensitive parts, refer to Section 14.4 on page

14-3.

Note The base station/repeater preselector can be replaced without shutting the power down.

The base station/repeater needs to be taken out of service in

order to carry out performance testing procedures. Unless the

base station/repeater is already out of service, it is

recommended to perform the procedures during off-peak

hours in order to minimize disruption of service to the system

subscribers.

9-10 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Basic Troubleshooting

3. Turn off the DC breaker, and/or pull the AC source power cord from the back of the base

station/repeater.

4. Remove the duplexer from the base station/repeater, as follows:

a. Label and disconnect the Rx output, Tx input, antenna output, and ground cables from the

duplexer.

b. Remove the four screws which secure the duplexer to the rack using a Torque Driver T30 bit.

5. Install the duplexer to the rack, as follows:

a. Secure the duplexer to the rack using the four screws which were previously removed.

b. Reconnect the Rx output, Tx input, antenna output, and ground cables from the duplexer.

6. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

7. Enable the channel that is using the base station/repeater in the system with the duplexer.

9.4.1.3 External Dual Circulator Tray

1. Wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD) strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground.

This strap must be worn throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components.

2. Turn off the DC breaker, and/or pull the AC source power cord from the back of the base

station/repeater.

3. Remove the filter tray from the rack, as follows:

a. Label and disconnect the RF input, RF output, and ground cables from the tray.

b. Disconnect the Circulator Load temperature cable at the inline connector (which disconnects

it from the cable leading to the RF Peripherals port on the base station/repeater backplane

interface board).

c. Using a Torque Driver T30 bit, remove the two screws which secure the tray to the rack.

d. Slide the tray out the front of the rack.

4. IF an individual External Dual Circulator module is replaced, perform the steps below.

Otherwise, proceed to Step 5.

a. Label and disconnect the RF input and RF output cables from the External Dual Circulator

module.

b. Unscrew the connector that secures the Circulator Load to the External Dual Circulator

module.

c. Remove the screws that secure the circulator baseplate to the tray.

d. Remove the circulator module including the circulator load module that extends beyond the

baseplate.

e. Place the new External Dual Circulator module in the tray in the same location and orientation

as the module which will be replaced.

f. Secure the new External Dual Circulator module baseplate to the tray using the screws

previously removed.

g. Connect the RF input and RF output cables to the new External Dual Circulator module.

h. Connect the Circulator Load to the External Dual Circulator module.

5. IF an individual Circulator Load is replaced, perform the steps below. Otherwise, proceed to

Step 6.

Note Skip step 3(b) for the UHF band.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Basic Troubleshooting 9-11

a. Unscrew the connector that secures the Circulator Load to the External Dual Circulator

module.

b. Remove the Circulator Load module.

c. Place the new Circulator Load module on the tray in the same position and orientation as the

module which will be removed.

d. Secure the new Circulator Load to the External Dual Circulator module by tightening the

connector.

e. Connect the Circulator load cable to the RF Peripherals port on the base station/repeater

backplane interface board.

6. IF an individual Low Pass/Harmonic Filter module is replaced, perform the steps below.

Otherwise, proceed to Step 7.

a. Label and disconnect the RF input and RF output cables from the Low Pass/Harmonic Filter

module.

b. Pull up firmly to release the Low Pass Filter module from the two semi-circular clips holding it

in place.

c. Insert the new Low Pass Filter module into the semi-circular clips using the same orientation

as the module which will be replaced.

d. Connect the RF input and RF output cables to the new Low Pass/Harmonic Filter module.

7. IF the entire tray including all of its modules are replaced, install the replacement tray in the

rack.

8. Turn on the DC breaker, and/or connect the AC source power cord to the back of the base

station/repeater.

9. Verify that the base station/repeater is operating properly using Customer Programming

Software (CPS).

Note Skip step 5(e) for the UHF band.

Shock Hazard. The MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater contains

voltages which can cause damage to the base station/repeater or other

equipment if a short circuit occurred. Turn off the DC breaker, and/or

pull the AC source power cord from the back of the base station/

repeater when servicing this component in the base station/repeater.

Note The functionality of RF Peripherals port (temperature monitoring) is not supported.

9-12 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

9.4.1.4 Antenna Relay

The antenna relay module is not field repairable and should be replaced in its entirety if it is faulty. To

replace it,

1. Turn off the base station/repeater power by turning off the breaker at the AC or DC source.

2. Remove the Antenna Relay module (installed on a flange on the rear of the PS module) by

• disconnecting the control and RF coaxial cables and

• using a Torque Driver T20 bit, remove the screws which secure the Antenna relay to the base

station/repeater.

3. Ensure that the correct replacement Antenna Relay module is being installed.

4. Install the replacement Antenna Relay module by reversing the procedures outlined in step 2

above.

5. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

9.5 Field Tuning Procedures

9.5.1 Base Station/Repeater Preselectors

Depending on the configuration, the base station/repeater may have an External Preselector

assembly with the always present internal preselector. The External Preselector assembly is a 3-

pole bandpass filter equipped with tuning slugs to adjust the passband corresponding to the

operating frequency (s) of the base station/repeater. For the internal preselector, circuitry in the

Receiver Module provides a varactor-tuned bandpass filter which adapts to the required frequency

range under the control of the Station Control Module.

The external preselector must be retuned if the preselector assembly or Receiver Module are

replaced in the field, or if the base station/repeater operating frequency (s) are modified. The internal

varactor-tuned preselector is factory-tuned to cover the relevant frequency band in its entirety. The

internal preselector does not require field tuning even if the Receiver Module is replaced.

9.5.1.1 External Preselector Tuning Procedure (with basic instruments)

9.5.1.1.1 Test Equipment

The following test equipment are required to properly tune the external preselector assembly:

• RF signal generator – Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer (see note

below), or HP8656A signal generator (or equivalent)

• Dip/Peak Monitor – HP435B Power Meter (or equivalent) with HP8484A sensitive power

head, Boonton Model 92E with BNC input, or Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System

Analyzer using the spectrum analyzer function

• Torque Driver capable of delivering 1.36 Nm (12 in-lb) of torque with a 10 mm deep well

socket

• Tuning probe

• Flat-blade screwdriver

Note There is no External Preselector for 800/900 MHz frequency band.

Note Tuning for best SINAD response DOES NOT result in optimum tuning of the preselector

assembly. Use this field tuning procedure to obtain optimum preselector performance.

Note When using Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer as the signal

generator, the RF signal must be taken from the Antenna port.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-13

9.5.1.1.2 Calculating Proper Alignment Frequency

Use one of the following two methods to calculate the alignment frequency to be generated by the

signal generator.

For stations with a single receive frequency, refer to the procedure below to calculate the alignment

frequency:

1. From the site documentation or the CPS, determine the base station/repeater receive

frequency. Add 200 kHz.

2. If the receive frequency is in the range of 403 MHz to 435 MHz, determine the alignment

frequency as follows:

• If frequency (from Step 1) is > 433 MHz, then alignment frequency = 433 MHz

• If frequency (from Step 1) is < 405 MHz, then alignment frequency = 405 MHz

• Otherwise, use the actual frequency from Step 1 (see note above).

3. If the receive frequency is in the range of 435 to 470 MHz, determine the alignment frequency

as follows:

• If frequency (from Step 1) is > 468 MHz, then alignment frequency = 468 MHz

• If frequency (from Step 1) is < 437 MHz, then alignment frequency = 437 MHz

• Otherwise, use the actual frequency from Step 1 (see note above).

4. If the receive frequency is in the range of 470 to 524 MHz, determine the alignment frequency

as follows:

• If frequency (from Step 1) is > 522 MHz, then alignment frequency = 522 MHz

• If frequency (from Step 1) is < 472 MHz, then alignment frequency = 472 MHz

• Otherwise, use the actual frequency from Step 1 (see note above).

For stations with multiple receive frequencies, refer to the procedure below to calculate the

alignment frequency:

1. From the site documentation or the CPS, note the receive frequency for each channel

supported by the base station/repeater.

2. Calculate midpoint frequency as follows:

Fmid = (Fhighest + Flowest) ÷ 2

3. Using Fmid in place of the base station/repeater receive frequency, perform Step 1 through

Step 3 from previous procedure (i.e., calculation of alignment for single receive frequency).

9.5.1.1.3 Preparing Equipment

1. If necessary, disconnect and remove the preselector assembly from the rear of the Station.

2. Connect the preselector, the base station/repeater, and test equipment as shown in Figure 9-

3. Using the torque driver and deep well socket, loosen all three tension nuts on the tuning

screws.

4. Detune the preselector by turning (ONLY) tuning screws 3 and 4 full clockwise until they just

bottom out.

Note Bandwidth limitation in Table 9-1 (i.e. (Fhighest – Flowest) ≤ Bandwidth)

9-14 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

9.5.1.1.4 Tuning Procedure

1. Apply AC power to the base station/repeater PS (to provide an active 50 Ω termination).

2. Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated in the previous steps. Set the level to

+5 dBm.

3. Insert tuning probe into cavity U2, and adjust tuning screw 2 for a PEAK.

4. Tighten tension nut on tuning screw 2 to at least 1.36Nm (12 in-lb) and fine tune tuning screw

2 for a PEAK.

5. Keep tuning probe in cavity U2 and adjust tuning screw 3 for a DIP.

6. Tighten tension nut on tuning screw 3 to at least 1.36Nm (12 in-lb) and fine tune tuning screw

3 for a DIP.

7. Insert tuning probe into cavity U3. Decrease output from signal generator to -5 dBm.

8. Adjust tuning screw 4 for a DIP.

9. Tighten tension nut on tuning screw 4 to at least 1.36Nm (12 in-lb) and fine tune tuning screw

4 for a DIP.

10. Mount the preselector assembly in the Station, and reconnect the previously-removed

cabling.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-15

Figure 9-7 Test Equipment Setup for External Preselector Field Tuning

HELP TAB

SELECT

CANCEL

IFR 390I Digital Radio Test Set

TEST HOLD

CONFIG

UTILS ENTER

MIC / ACC GENT/RANT

RETURN

212HCEPOCS1HCTROP TSET AUDIO INFCTN GEN / DEMOD OUT

ASSIGN

–

456

HELP

Disconnect

Receive

Antenna

Station

Receive

Input

DIP/PEAK

MONITOR

(RF mV or

power meter)

Tuning

Probe

Tension

nut

Tuning

Screws

4U4

RF In / Out

Aeroflex 3900 Series

Communications

Systems Analyzer

Tuning

Cavities

Preselector

Assembly

INPUT

OUTPUT

Station – rear

9-16 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

9.5.1.2 External Preselector Tuning Procedure (with advanced instruments)

Organization of this tuning procedure is as follows:

• Section 9.5.1.2.1 on page 9-16 identifies the test equipment needed.

• Section 9.5.1.2.2 on page 9-16 identifies the specific Network Analyzer (NWA) set-up steps

for each of the 380–435 MHz, 435–470 MHz, and 470–524 MHz band preselectors.

• Section 9.5.1.2.3 on page 9-17 identifies detailed steps for tuning the 435–470 MHz

preselector as an example of the process for also tuning the 380–435 MHz and 470–524

MHz band preselectors. Be sure to review the Note at the end of this section during each

tuning procedure.

9.5.1.2.1 Test Equipment

The following test equipment are required to properly tune the external preselector assembly:

• Network Analyzer – E5063A / E5071B / E5071C / or other series

• SMA-type calibrator – Agilent 85033E

• Tuning cable – N-type

• Screwdriver – Flat head

• Adaptor – MINI_UHF / SMA_JK

• Adaptor – N-SMA

• Torque measuring wrench

9.5.1.2.2 Equipment Setup

For the 380–435 MHz preselector,

1. Initial frequency setup: Press the START key, input 340 MHz, then press the STOP key and

input 585 MHz.

2. Marker Setup: Enter the nine (9) marker frequencies shown below into the NWA memory.

3. Output level setup: Select MENU, press POWER and input 10 dBm.

4. Sweep points setup: Select MENU, press NUMBER OF POINTS soft key, and input 401.

6. S-parameter plot setup: Select S12 (S21), press SCALE REF key, then select

REFERENCE POSITION soft key, and input 10/DIV, next press REFERENCEVALUE and

input 0.

Table 9-8 Marker setup table for 380–435 MHz

Mark No. Frequency Mark No. Frequency Mark No. Frequency

Mark1 378 MHz Mark4 437 MHz Mark7 414.7 MHz

Mark2 382 MHz Mark5 525 MHz Mark8 469.7 MHz

Mark3 433 MHz Mark6 580 MHz Mark9 451.4 MHz

Note The frequencies in Table 9-8 is with passband 378 MHz–382 MHz and 433 MHz–437 MHz.

Display mode setup: Select DISPLAY, press ALLOCATE CHANNELS soft key, then select

“X1 “”, next return DISPLAY page and press NUMBER OF TRACES and select 2; finally

return DISPLAY page again and press ALLOCATE TRACES and select “X2 “ ”.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-17

7. Set S11 (S22) plot as return loss: Press FORMAT key, select LOG MAG soft key, then

select SCALE REF, press SCALE/DIVE and input 1/DIV, and turn to REFERENCEVALUE

soft key and input -18.

For the 435–470 MHz preselector,

1. Initial frequency setup: Press START key, input 400 MHz, then press STOP key and input

620 MHz.

2. Marker Setup: Enter the nine (9) marker frequencies shown below into the NWA memory.

3. Refer to 380–435 MHz instrument setup (Step 3 to Step 7).

For the 470–524 MHz preselector,

1. Initial frequency setup: Press START key, input 450 MHz, then press STOP key and input

670 MHz.

2. Marker Setup: Enter the nine (9) marker frequencies shown below into the NWA memory.

3. Refer to 380–435 MHz instrument setup (Step 3 to Step 7).

9.5.1.2.3 Tuning procedures and methods

After instrument setup, calibrate the instrument according to the standard template, then save all

parameters into the memory before proceeding with unit tuning. Correctness and accuracy of

calibration can be ensured before tuning process.

The procedures for tuning are the same for the 380–435 MHz, 435–470 MHz, and 470–524 MHz

band preselectors. The example shown below applies for the 435–470 MHz band preselector.

Table 9-9 Marker setup table for 435–470 MHz

Mark No. Frequency Mark No. Frequency Mark No. Frequency

Mark1 433 MHz Mark4 472 MHz Mark7 469.7 MHz

Mark2 437 MHz Mark5 580 MHz Mark8 504.7 MHz

Mark3 468 MHz Mark6 615 MHz Mark9 506.4 MHz

Note The frequencies in Table 9-9 is with passband 433–437 MHz and 468–472 MHz.

Table 9-10 Marker setup table for 470–524 MHz

Mark No. Frequency Mark No. Frequency Mark No. Frequency

Mark1 468 MHz Mark4 526 MHz Mark7 504.7 MHz

Mark2 472 MHz Mark5 615 MHz Mark8 558.7 MHz

Mark3 522 MHz Mark6 669 MHz Mark9 541.4 MHz

Note The frequencies in Table 9-10 is with passband 468–472 MHz and 522–526 MHz.

9-18 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

1. Unit connection

a. If necessary, disconnect and remove the 435–470 MHz band preselector assembly from

the rear of the base station/repeater.

b. Connect the 435–470 MHz band preselector to the NWA via the adaptors and cables

shown in Figure 9-8.

c. Using the torque driver and deep well socket, loosen all three tension nuts on the adjust-

ment screws.

d. Detune the preselector by turning tuning (ONLY) screws 3 and 4 full clockwise until they

just bottom out.

Figure 9-8 Connection of the 435–470 MHz band preselector

2. Unit Tuning

a. Initial Curve

With the detuned preselector, the NWA display should be similar to that shown in the full

START-STOP bandwidth of Figure 9-9.

To expand and thus better display the curve, readjust the STOP band value to a lower value

(such as 505 MHz as shown in Figure 9-10).

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-19

Figure 9-9 Initial curve (Start 400 MHz, Stop 620 MHz)

Figure 9-10 Initial curve (Start 400 MHz, Stop 505 MHz)

9-20 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

b. Rough Tuning

i. Adjustment of the tuning screws changes the position of the frequency peaks on the

displayed curves. As an example, note that when screw 4 is adjusted counterclockwise,

the resonance peak moves to the left and if turned clockwise, the peak moves to the

right as indicated by the yellow arrow in Figure 9-11.

Figure 9-11 Passband tuning of tuning screw 4

ii. Adjust tuning screw 4 until the peak moves into the 468–472MHz range (the area

between Marker 3 and Marker 4). Refer to Figure 9-12.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-21

Figure 9-12 Passband tuned to required range (tuning screw 4)

iii. Tune at screw 3 until the peak adjusted by it moves into the passband similar to that

shown in Figure 9-13 and then into the area between Marker 3 and Marker 4. Refer to

Figure 9-14.

9-22 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

Figure 9-13 Passband tuning of tuning screw 3

Figure 9-14 Passband tuned to required range (tuning screw 3)

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-23

iv. Tune at screw 2 until the return loss curve dips in alignment with the passband similar to

that shown in Figure 9-15. This completes the Rough Tuning procedure.

Figure 9-15 Passband tuned to required range (tuning screw 2)

v. Tighten the three tuning nuts to approximately 1.0 Nm (10 in-lbs), until the tuning screws

are not loose but still can be adjusted.

9-24 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

c. Fine Tuning

i. The 435–470 MHz band preselector is now roughly tuned to the required passband.

Refer to Figure 9-16 and Figure 9-17. The preselector performance will now be fine-

tuned to specification-required frequencies and levels.

Figure 9-16 Passband and return loss after rough tuning

Figure 9-17 Return loss

ii. In this process, make only small (less than 10°) adjustments. Working with each of the

tuning screws 2, 3, or 4 (one at a time), make slight adjustments in either direction while

observing the return loss curve. For example, turning one of the screws clockwise may

result in worse return loss such as shown in Figure 9-18 or better as shown in

Figure 9-19.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-25

Figure 9-18 Turn screw clockwise

Figure 9-19 Turn screw counter clockwise

9-26 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

iii. Continue this process of adjusting each of the screws one at a time by very small

rotations until the optimized return loss performance is provided as shown in Figure 9-20

where all of the return loss curve is well below the red limit line.

Figure 9-20 Result after fine tuning

3. Final Inspection

a. Inspect the final performance curves and parameter plot against the standard mask

template needed to meet specifications. Refer to Figure 9-21.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-27

Figure 9-21 Inspect against mask template

b. Tighten the tuning nuts to approximately 1.36 Nm (12 in-lbs), so the screws are secure.

Make very slight adjustments at any of the screws to compensate for change tightening

that screw causes.

4. Reassembly

a. Mount the preselector assembly in the Station, and reconnect the previously-removed

cabling.

Note • All instruments should be properly calibrated before operation.

• All joints between cavity and instrument should be checked. Loose connections can

greatly impact the tuning results.

• Rejection meets specification requirements after passband and return loss are tuned,

and it is needless to check one by one. However, the passband shall be tuned to the center

frequency. In other words, insertion loss of two side frequencies of passband is

approximate.

• Lock the tension nut with proper torque force: 1.2 Nm~1.3 Nm. Excessive torque will lead

to excessively tight locking (hard to tune) and inadequate to loose locking (tuning screw

falling off)

9-28 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

9.5.2 Duplexer

Duplexer modules shipped with stations are tuned at the factory. If a duplexer must be replaced in

the field, the unit must be installed and tuned specifically to the transmit and receive frequency pair

for the particular base station/repeater.

The duplexer module is comprised of three low-pass/high-notch cavities and three high-pass/low-

notch cavities. Each set of three cavities provides bandpass filtering for either the transmit RF signal

or the receive RF signal. In general, the duplexer must be tuned so that the transmit cavity set

passes the transmit signal and rejects the receive signal and, at the same time, the receive cavity set

must be tuned to pass the receive signal and reject the transmit signal.

Tuning is performed by injecting RF signals and making tuning adjustments (using the tuning pass

and notch and trimmer screws) while monitoring for maximum or minimum readings on the RF

millivoltmeter. Field tuning the duplexer module requires the following general adjustments:

• Tune high-pass/low-notch cavities for maximum pass and reject response

• Tune low-pass/high-notch cavities for maximum pass and reject response

• Check high-pass/low-notch and low-pass/high-notch cavities for insertion loss

• Check high-pass/low-notch and low-pass/high-notch cavities for isolation

9.5.2.1 Duplexer Tuning Procedure (with basic instruments)

9.5.2.1.1 Test Equipment

The following test equipment are required to properly tune the duplexer module:

• Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer (or equivalent)

• RF Millivoltmeter (Boonton 92E or equivalent)

• RF Signal Generator (HP8565B or equivalent)

•50 Ω N-type terminator

• Tuning tool; 4 mm x 10.1 cm (5/32" x 4") screwdriver

• N-to-N bullet connector (UG29A/U or equivalent)

• 11 mm (7/16") Nutdriver

• 11 mm (7/16") Open End Wrench

• N-to-BNC Adapter (UG349A/U)

• N-to-N Connector (UG57B/U)

Note The 800 MHz duplexer module is fixed and does not require tuning.

This tuning procedure is valid for channels with a bandwidth

of 200 kHz or less. If the bandwidth is more than 200 kHz, the

duplexer must be tuned by the service depot.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-29

9.5.2.1.2 Setting Up for Tuning Duplexer

Perform the preliminary tasks shown in Figure 9-22 to prepare the duplexer module for tuning.

Figure 9-22 Preliminary Tasks Prior to Tuning Duplexer

1. Disconnect twelve N-type connectors and

remove six cables from cavities.

2. For each of the 6 cavities, use

open-end wrench to loosen

locknuts (2 per cavity).

Low-Pass High -

Notch Cavities

High-Pass Low-

Notch Cavities

ANT

Notching

Adjustment

Screw

Pass

Adjustment

Screw

C a u t i o n

Each Duplexer cable is unique and must be returned to the original position when removed. Use tape

to label each end of each cable to ensure it is correctly replaced.

9-30 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

9.5.2.1.3 Duplexer Tuning Procedure

The duplexer field tuning procedures are provided in Figure 9-23 to Figure 9-26. The procedures are

most easily performed with the duplexer module removed from the base station/repeater rack or

cabinet. Be sure to take note of the transmit and receive frequencies for the particular base station/

repeater before beginning.

If the duplexer module is tuned according to instructions and does not meet specifications for return

loss, insertion loss, and/or isolation, return the duplexer for repair.

The notch (reject) frequency will maintain its spacing to the pass frequency when the pass

adjustment of a cavity is moved several MHz. For example, a system operating at 455 MHz and 460

MHz, which is moved to 460 MHz and 465 MHz will require a minimum of readjustment if the pass

adjustment is made first. It is therefore recommended that the pass adjustments be made first and

that the procedures provided in Figure 9-23 to Figure 9-26 are followed.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-31

Figure 9-23 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure

Boonton 92E RF

Millivoltmeter

Range set to +10 dBm

2. Tuning Low Pass Resonators

1. Set up test equipment as

shown, connecting to cavity no.1.

2. Use nut driver to adjust pass

adjustment screw for cavity no.1

to obtain a peak reading on the

millivoltmeter.

3. Use open end wrench and

tighten lock nut carefully, making

sure pass adjustment screw does

not shift position.

4. Repeat steps 1–3 for cavities

no.2 and no.3.

Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,

whichever is LOWER.

Output Level set to +10 dBm.

Resonator Pass Adjustment

Screw and Lock Nut

6 dB In-line

pad (50Ω)

3. Tuning High Pass Resonators

1. Set up test equipment as

shown, connecting to cavity no.4.

2. Use nut driver to adjust pass

adjustment screw for cavity no.4

to obtain a PEAK reading on the

millivoltmeter.

3. Use open end wrench and

tighten lock nut carefully, making

sure pass adjustment screw does

not shift position.

4. Repeat steps 1–3 for cavities

no.5 and no.6.

123456

HP8656B Signal Generator

Boonton 92E RF

Millivoltmeter

Range set to +10 dBm

Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,

whichever is HIGHER.

Output Level set to +10 dBm.

Resonator Pass Adjustment

Screw and Lock Nut

6 dB In-line

pad (50 Ω)

1 2 3 4 5 6

HP8656B Signal Generator

1. To Start

Remove cables from the duplexer, noting and label the position of each cable. Each cable is unique and must be

returned to the original position when tuning is complete.

9-32 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

Figure 9-24 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued)

4. Tuning High Notch Loop Assemblies

1. Set up test equipment as shown,

connecting to cavity no.1.

2. Use screwdriver to adjust notch

adjustment screw for cavity no.1 to

obtain a minimum reading on the

millivoltmeter. (Reduce the range on

the millivoltmeter as necessary to

reach true minimum reading.)

3. Use open end wrench and tighten

lock nut carefully, making sure notch

adjustment screw does not shift

position.

4. Repeat steps 1–3 for cavities no.2

and no.3.

5. Tuning Low Notch Loop Assemblies

1. Set up test equipment as shown,

connecting to cavity no.4.

2. Use screwdriver to adjust notch

adjustment screw for cavity no.4 to

obtain a minimum reading on the

millivoltmeter. (Reduce the range on

the millivoltmeter as necessary to

reach true minimum reading.)

3. Use open end wrench and tighten

lock nut carefully, making sure notch

adjustment screw does not shift

position.

4. Repeat steps 1–3 for cavities no.5

and no.6.

5. Reconnect the cables on the

duplexer. Make sure that the cables

are returned to their original position

on the Duplexer.

Boonton 92E RF

Millivoltmeter

Range set to +10 dBm

Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,

whichever is HIGHER.

Output Level set to +10 dBm.

Notch Adjustment

Screw and Lock

Nut

6 dB In-line

pad (50 Ω)

1 2 3 4 5 6

HP8656B Signal Generator

Notch Adjustment

Screw and Lock Nut

6 dB In-line pad

(50 Ω)

Boonton 92E RF

Millivoltmeter

Range set to +10 dBm

Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,

whichever is LOWER.

Output Level set to +10 dBm.

Resonator Pass Adjustment

Screw and Lock Nut

1 2 3 4 5 6

HP8656B Signal Generator

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-33

Figure 9-25 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued)

Boonton 92E RF

Millivoltmeter

Range set to +10 dBm

6.Verifying Insertion Loss

1. Connect test equipment as shown.

2. Observe and note the level in dBm

as shown on the millivoltmeter.

3. Connect the duplexer cables and

test equipment to the duplexer as

shown.

4. Observe and note the level in dBm

as shown on the millivoltmeter.

5. Subtract the absolute number

noted in Step 2 from the number noted

in Step 4. The difference should be

less than 1.3 dB to meet specification

for Insertion Loss.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 for Low- Pass/

High Notch cavities with the following

exceptions:

a. Set Frequency Generator for

Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is

LOWER

b. Connect Signal Generator to

Low Pass duplexer input (cavity

no.1)

c. Connect terminator to cavity

no.6.

Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,

whichever is HIGHER.

Output Level set to +10 dBm.

Boonton 92E RF

Millivoltmeter

HP8656B Signal Generator

6 dB In-line pad

(50 Ω)

UG349A

N-to-BNC

Connector

50 Ω Terminator

6 dB In-line

pad (50 Ω)

1 6

9-34 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

Figure 9-26 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued)

Monitor Function.

Center frequency set to Tx or Rx

frequency, whichever is LOWER

Attenuator set to -50 dBm

Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System

Analyzer

Attenuator set to 0 dBm

7.Verifying Isolation

1. Connect test equipment as

shown.

2. Observe and note the level in

dBm as shown on the Aeroflex 3900

Series Communications System

Analyzer display.

3. Connect the test equipment to the

duplexer as shown.

4. Observe and note the level in

dBm as shown on the Aeroflex 3900

Series Communications System

Analyzer display. (If no number is

displayed, consider isolation to be

greater than 105 dB, which exceeds

the specification.)

5. Subtract the absolute number

noted in Step 4 from the number noted

in Step 2. The difference should be

higher than 100 dB to meet

specification for Isolation.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 for Low- Pass/

High Notch cavities with the following

exceptions:

a. Set Frequency Generator and

Aeroflex 3900 Series

Communications System Analyzer

for Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is

HIGHER

b. Connect Signal Generator to

Low Pass duplexer input (cavity

no.1)

c. Connect terminator to cavity

no.6.

Frequency set to Rx or Tx frequency,

whichever is LOWER.

Output Level set to +10 dBm.

HP8656B Signal Generator

UG29A/U Bullet

Connector

Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System

Analyzer

50 Ω Terminator

6 dB In-line

pad (50 Ω)

1 6

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-35

Figure 9-27 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued)

This completes the Duplexer Tuning Procedure (with basic instruments). To obtain a more precise

calibration, refer to Section 9.5.2.2 on page 9-36 to perform the Duplexer Tuning Procedure (with

advanced instruments).

8. Post-Tuning Checks

1. Make sure all six notch adjustment

lock nuts are tight.

2. Make sure all six pass adjustment

lock nuts are tight.

ANT

9-36 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

9.5.2.2 Duplexer Tuning Procedure (with advanced instruments)

9.5.2.2.1 Initial Settings

1. Power up the Network Analyzer (NWA), HP 8753C or equivalent. For UHF (U04, U05, U06,

U07), the NWA has to be calibrated to the appropriate frequency sub-bands.

Refer to Table 9-11.

2. Adjust the NWA START frequency, STOP frequency, SPAN etc., based on the LO and HI

frequencies to which the unit has to be tuned to. Set the NWA source power to 10 dBm.

9.5.2.2.2 Tuning the LO side

1. Connect the two N-type test cables hooked up on ports 1 and 2 of the NWA to the two N type

female connectors of LO side Cavity 1. Set up markers on the NWA-Marker 1 (m1) to LO

frequency on CH1 (S11–Reflection) and Marker 2 (m2) to HI frequency on CH2 (S21–

Transmission).

Table 9-11 Frequency Range (U04, U05, U06, U07)

Frequency

U04 403–435 MHz

U05 435–470 MHz

U06 470–494 MHz

U07 494–512 MHz

Note Please note that the duplexer tuning procedures from Section 9.5.2.2.2 on page

9-36 to Section 9.5.2.2.4 on page 9-39 are applicable to UHF and VHF bands

although the test frequencies represented in the figures below are for VHF bands.

Each Duplexer cable is unique and must be returned to the original

position when removed. Use tape to label each end of each cable to

ensure it is correctly replaced.

C a u t i o n

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-37

Figure 9-28 Untuned LO SIDE–Cavity 1

2. Turn the notch screw until Marker 1 falls in the dip of the CH1 curve as shown in Figure 9-29.

Lightly tighten the locknut in place to prevent further movement.

Figure 9-29 Tuned CH1 - LO SIDE–Cavity 1

3. Turn the pass screw until Marker 2 falls in the dip of the CH2 curve as shown in Figure 9-30.

Lightly tighten the locknut in place to prevent further movement.

Figure 9-30 Tuned CH1, CH2 - LO SIDE–Cavity 1

9-38 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

4. Do not change the settings on the network analyzer, just repeat Step 1, 2, and 3 for the other

LO cavities 2 and 3 on the left.

9.5.2.2.3 Tuning the HI side

1. Connect the two N-type test cables hooked up on the ports 1,2 of the NWA to the two N type

female connectors of HI cavity 4. Set up markers on the NWA-Marker 1 to HI Frequency on

CH2 (S21–Transmission) and Marker 2 to LO Frequency on CH1 (S22–Reflection).

Figure 9-31 Untuned HI SIDE–Cavity 4

2. Turn the notch screw until Marker 1 falls in the dip of the CH1 curve as shown in Figure 9-32.

Lightly tighten the locknut in place to prevent further movement.

Figure 9-32 Tuned CH1 - HI SIDE–Cavity 4

3. Turn the pass screw until Marker 2 falls in the dip of the CH2 curve as shown in Figure 9-33.

Lightly tighten the locknut in place to prevent further movement.

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-39

Figure 9-33 Tuned CH1, CH2 - HI SIDE–Cavity 4

4. Do not change the settings on the network analyzer, just repeat Step 5, 6, and 7 for the other

HI cavities 5 and 6 on the right.

9.5.2.2.4 Fine Tuning the Duplexer

1. When all 6 cavities have been tuned separately, connect the Port 1 NWA cable to the N con-

nector of the LO side input cavity (cavity 1) and the Port 2 of NWA to the duplexer Antenna

port (ANT) respectively.

a. Connect ports 1 and 2 of the NWA to the LO input side (far left) and ANT, respectively. The

desired response on the NWA for m1 (return loss), m2 (insertion loss), and m3 (noise

suppression) is as shown in Figure 9-34.

Figure 9-34 LO Side Response Curves

b. Now connect ports 1 and 2 of the NWA to the ANT and the HI input side (far right),

respectively. The desired response on the NWA for the m1 (return loss), m2 (insertion

loss), and the m3 (noise suppression) markers is as shown in Figure 9-35.

9-40 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

Figure 9-35 HI Side Response Curves

2. If all the specification limits are met with some margin, stop tuning the unit any further. With

caution, fine tuning of the tuning notch and pass, and tuning screws can be done to improve

the performance further in cases where the response seems to be marginal. This is more

significant in cases where the T/R spacing is 1.5 MHz or lower. For the sample shown, fine

tuning was done to improve the performance slightly, as shown by comparing Figure 9-34 to

Figure 9-36 and Figure 9-35 to Figure 9-37.

Figure 9-36 After Fine Tuning–LO Side Response Curves

MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures 9-41

Figure 9-37 After Fine Tuning–HI Side Response Curves

3. Refer to Figure 9-38 for the post-tuning checks.

Figure 9-38 UHF Duplexer Field Tuning Procedure (continued)

This completes the Duplexer Tuning Procedure (with advanced instruments).

1. Make sure all six notch adjustment

lock nuts are tight.

2. Make sure all six pass adjustment

lock nuts are tight.

ANT

Notes

9-42 MTR3000 Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) Equipment: Field Tuning Procedures

Chapter 10 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade

10.1 Overview

The MTR3000 platform supports a digital upgrade kit which allow customers with fielded analog

MTR2000 radios to upgrade the station control module (SCM), Receiver and Exciter modules and

migrate their radio to a digital MOTOTRBO product. These modules are not assembled together

when it is shipped.

An "upgraded base station/repeater" is comprised of a new front bezel, new Exciter module, new

Receiver module, new SCM module, and utilizing the remaining components from the MTR2000

Base Station/Repeater (BR). Existing peripherals that are being utilized for the MTR2000 Base

Station/Repeater can retrofit the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater once it is upgraded. There is no

need to purchase a new Duplexer, Preselector, External Dual Circulator or Antenna Relay.

The MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade allows a MTR2000 customer to migrate from analog to

digital. The available digital systems are:

• MOTOTRBO (2 slot TDMA digital over the air DMR standard)

• Capacity Plus

• IP Site Connect

The features that are upgradeable from MTR2000 are:

• Air Interface/Conventional – Analog Conventional

• Station Operation – Base Station Analog, Repeater Analog

• Channel Configuration – Half Duplex, Full Duplex

• Air Interface/Trunked – Analog Trunking (LTR and Passport)

• Frequency

- Rx/Tx : 403–470 MHz (UHF)

- Rx : 806–825 MHz (800 MHz), 896–902 MHz (900 MHz)

- Tx : 851–870 MHz (800 MHz), 935–941 MHz (900 MHz)

• Transmitter Capability

- UHF : 30 W (low power), 40 W (low power) or 100 W (high power)

- 800/900 MHz : 75 W

• Hardware Peripheral Compatibility – Preselector, Duplexer, External Dual Circulator Tray,

Antenna Relay, External Frequency Reference, Angus Battery Charger

10-2 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade: Unpacking

The information below is an overview for installing the base station/repeater and ancillary equipment.

• Unpacking and inspecting the equipment

• Mechanically install the equipment at the site

• Make necessary electrical and cabling connections:

- Audio

-GPIO

- Ethernet

• Perform Alignment

• Perform Configuration

• Perform a post-install functional checkout test to verify installation

10.2 Unpacking

This section describes the procedures to unpack the new front bezel, new SCM module, new Exciter

and Receiver modules from the packaging prior to installing them.

10.2.1 Equipment Unpacking and Inspection

10.2.1.1 Introduction

The new front bezel, new Exciter module, new Receiver module and new SCM module may be

shipped by either air freight or electronic van (as specified by customer), except where noted.

Thoroughly inspect the equipment as soon as possible after delivery. If any part of the equipment is

damaged during transit, immediately report the extent of the damage to the transportation company

and to Motorola.

10.2.1.2 Unpacking Equipment

The new front bezel, new Exciter Module, new Receiver Module and new Station Control Module are

packed in four separate boxes which are packed together in a common box. The individual boxes

are cushioned between corrugated cardboard in a common box.

Note For the correct procedure in handling static-sensitive parts, refer to Section 14.4 on page

14-3.

Note Once the upgrade is performed, the Wireline and Auxiliary I/O board functionality will no

longer be supported.

To avoid damage to the parts, be sure to observe proper electrostatic

discharge precautions when modules are removed from the base

station/repeater.

MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade: Unpacking 10-3

10.2.1.3 Analog to Digital Migration Path – Removal and Replacement

1. Remove the MTR2000 Base Station/Repeater front bezel from its chassis locking clip by

carefully pulling the bezel forward (Refer to Figure 10-1).

Figure 10-1 Removing Front Bezel

2. Disconnect the Exciter-to-PA Coaxial Cable and Rx Input Cable (Refer to Figure 10-2). By

disconnecting the cables, the Exciter Module, Receiver Module, Station Control Module

(SCM) are accessible.

Figure 10-2 Removing RF cable

3. Remove the two screws securing the Transceiver (SCM, Exciter, and Receiver modules) to

the bottom plate. Pull forward on the cast knobs, carefully slide the assembly out of the base

station/repeater (Refer to Figure 10-3) and place it aside.

Cast knob

Chassis locking clip

10-4 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade: Unpacking

Figure 10-3 Removing two screws securing the Transceiver Assembly

4. Remove the Wireline and Auxiliary I/O Card(s) (if any are installed) as the card(s) will not be

supported in an upgraded MTR2000.

5. Secure the new Station Control Module (SCM), Exciter and Receiver Modules using the eight

screws (Refer to Figure 10-4) supplied with the MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade kit to

form the new Transceiver Assembly.

Figure 10-4 Putting together new SCM, Exciter and Receiver

6. Slide the new Transceiver Assembly into the MTR2000 Base Station/Repeater (along the

guide rails) to mate with the connector on the backplane interface board.

MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade: New Connections 10-5

7. Secure the Transceiver Assembly to the bottom plate by fastening the screws in Step 3

(Refer to Figure 10-3).

8. Affix the provided MTR3000 FCC upgrade label to the area noted in Figure 10-5.

Figure 10-5 Location to affix the MTR3000 FCC upgrade label

9. Affix the provided Part 68 label to the area noted in Figure 10-6 (if not already present).

Figure 10-6 Location to affix the Part 68 label

10. Reconnect the Exciter-to-PA Coaxial Cable and Rx Input Cable.

10.3 New Connections

After the base station/repeater equipment has been mechanically installed, connections must be

made. This involves making the following new connections to:

• J7 Backplane Connector to support the following analog third party boxes (If applicable)

- Community Repeater Panel

- Tone Remote Controller (Console Connection)

- LTR Trunking Controller

- Passport (NTS) Controller

- Phone Patch

- Deskset

Note The label must not cover the serial number of the MTR2000 Base Station/Repeater.

Note The Part 68 label is supplied if the MTR3000 Wireline Card is ordered as an option with the

MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade Base Station/Repeater.

Designated area

10-6 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade: New Connections

• Ethernet to support the following MOTOTRBO features

- IP Site Connect

-RDAC

- Capacity Plus

-Connect Plus

Note 1. It is not recommended to perform a digital upgrade and use the upgraded base station/

repeater in analog mode as certain analog functionality will be lost. Refer to Product

Planner for details.

2. 14.2 VDC power (Pin 20) and GPIO_9 (Pin 5) are not supported on an upgraded

MTR2000 J7 backplane connector. If 12 VDC power is required on an upgraded

MTR2000, then it must be obtained from Pin32 of connector J5.

MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade: New Connections 10-7

10.3.1 AUX Connector

The location of the AUX connector is located at the base station/repeater rear panel. The following

cables are the reference cables used for this connector:

• Auxiliary System Cable, Part no. X244AJ

• System Connector Cable, Part no. C540AD

10.3.2 System Connector

For details on the system connectors, refer to "Chapter 6".

10.3.3 Telephone Line Connections

For details on the telephone line connections, refer to "Chapter 6".

10.3.4 Station Maintenance Connections

Table 10-1 provides a description of the maintenance connections located on the front of the Station

Control Module.

Table 10-1 Station Maintenance Connections on the SCM

Connector Name Function Details

5/10 MHz External

Reference (J3008)

For alignment and for

receipt of external

reference.

Achieved automatically and does not require

configuration in the CPS. This is a 50 Ω input that is

compatible with a 2Vpp (min) to 5Vpp (max) sine or

square wave.

Service Speaker (J3010)1Output to Power Voice

speaker

Adjustable between 0 to 500 mV across 50 kΩ

@60% system deviation. Audio signal appears

between Pins 3 and 4 on the connector. Must use

speaker type HSN1000 (older model) or HSN1006

via adapter cable Part.No. 0185180U01.

Note : The Speaker port is only supported in analog

mode regardless of the speaker used.

Microphone (J3000)1Local Microphone Input Use local microphone type GMN6147 (older model)

or GMMN4063. Modulation sensitivity for 60%

system deviation is typically 56 mV rms.

Note : The Mic port is only supported in analog

mode regardless of the Mic used. For older model of

microphone (GMN6147), the 3 control buttons for

speaker volume control, Rx monitor and Intercom

control functions are not supported.

Note 1. Only work in analog mode.

10-8 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade: Operational Verification

10.4 Operational Verification

After the base station/repeater equipment has been mechanically installed and all electrical

connections have been made, replace the new MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater front bezel by

inserting one of the front bezel locking clip into corresponding latch on the base station/repeater

housing, and carefully pressing the bezel on the opposite side until the second locking clip snaps into

place.

10.4.1 Applying Power

Before applying power to the base station/repeater, make sure all modules are securely seated in

the appropriate connectors on the backplane interface board and that all RF cables are securely

connected.

Plug in the AC line cord that supplies power to the base station/repeater Power Supply, or switch on

the DC-breaker to a base station/repeater with a DC power source to the Power Supply.

10.4.2 Alignment and Configuration

After the base station/repeater and ancillary equipment have been mechanically installed, properly

cabled, and power applied, the equipment must be optimized before placing the base station/

repeater in operation. Align with the Tuner application followed by configuration with the CPS

application.

10.4.3 Optimizing Tasks

Refer to "Chapter 13" for optimizing tasks.

10.4.4 Verifying Radio Operation

Refer to "Chapter 12" for procedures to verify Exciter and Receiver circuitry operation.

10.4.5 Verifying Proper Operation

For details in this section, refer to Table 1-9.

Note 1. The base station/repeater will be locked after alignment with the Tuner application. To

unlock it, the codeplug must be read and then written to by the CPS application.

2. The base station/repeater reference must be aligned as shown in Section 14.3.3 on

page 14-2, before the base station/repeater is placed on the air.

Chapter 11 MTR3000 Test Equipment And Service Aids

11.1 Recommended Test Equipment

The list of equipment contained in Table 11-1 includes most of the standard test equipment required

for servicing Motorola base station/repeaters.

Table 11-1 Recommended Test Equipment

Equipment Characteristic Example Application

Service Monitor Can be used as a

substitute for items

marked with an asterisk

(*)

Aeroflex 3900 Series

Communications System

Analyzer (www.aeroflex.com),

General Dynamics R8000 with

optional DMR/MOTOTRBO

options installed

(www.gdsatcom.com) or

equivalent

Frequency/deviation meter and

signal generator for wide-range

troubleshooting and alignment

Digital rms

Multimeter*

100 µV to 300V

5 Hz to 1 MHz

10 MegΩ Impedance

Fluke 179 or equivalent

(www.fluke.com)

AC/DC voltage and current

measurements. Audio voltage

measurements

Oscilloscope* 2 Channel

100 MHz Bandwidth

5 mV/div to 20V/div

Leader LS8050

(www.leaderusa.com),

Tektronix TDS1001b

(www.tektronix.com),

or equivalent

Waveform measurements

Power Meter and

Sensor*

5% Accuracy

100 MHz to 500 MHz

50 Watts

Bird 43 throughline Watt Meter

(www.bird-electronic.com) or

equivalent

Power Output measurements for

use on “analog” channels

RF Millivolt Meter 100 mV to 3V RF

10 kHz to 1 GHz

Boonton 92EA

(www.boonton.com)

or equivalent

RF level measurements

11-2 MTR3000 Test Equipment And Service Aids: Service Aids

11.2 Service Aids

Table 11-2 lists the service aids recommended for working on the MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

(BR). While all of these items are available from Motorola, most are standard workshop equipment

items, and any equivalent item capable of the same performance may be substituted for the item

listed.

Table 11-2 Service Aids

Motorola

Part Number Description Application

DDN9957A Standard Type "A" to Type "B"

USB Programming cable

To connect a service computer to the MTR3000 Base

Station/Repeater’s front USB port for Programming,

Testing and Alignment.

HSN1006 Speaker To listen to any active audible alarms

Note : The speaker port on the base station/repeater is

compatible with Service Speaker HSN1000 (older

model) or HSN1006.

3083191X02 RJ-45 to BNC cable / Receiver

Audio Test Cable

Connects the external speaker RJ-45 jack to the

Oscilloscope input BNC connector

GMMN4063 Microphone To transmit voice by connecting it to microphone

connector on SCM

Note : The microphone port on the base station/repeater

is compatible with microphone GMN6147 (older model)

or GMMN4063. The older model of microphone

(GMN6147) only works in analog mode and does not

support the 3 control buttons for speaker volume

control, Rx monitor and Intercom control functions.

0185180U01 Speaker adapter cable To connect the speaker to speaker connector on SCM

RVN5115 Customer Programming

Software (CPS) Package

(Includes CPS, Air Tracer,

Tuner, Radio Diagnostic and

Control (RDAC))

Program customer option and channel data

6683334X01 Option Card Tool To pull the option boards (such as the Wireline Interface

Boards or the Auxiliary Input/Output board)

Chapter 12 MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing

12.1 General

The MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater (BR) meets published specifications through the

manufacturing process by utilizing high-accuracy laboratory-quality test equipment. The

recommended field service equipment approaches the accuracy of the manufacturing equipment

with few exceptions. This accuracy must be maintained in compliance with the equipment

manufacturer’s recommended calibration schedule.

12.2 Verifying Transmitter Circuitry

12.2.1 Introduction

While most module faults can be detected by running the base station/repeater diagnostics, the

following procedure provides a more traditional method of troubleshooting the transmitter circuitry.

This procedure allows the service technician to make minor adjustments and verify proper operation

of the base station/repeater transmit circuitry, including:

• Exciter Module

• Power Amplifier Module

• Power Supply Module

• Transmitter-related circuitry in the SCM

In general, the transmitter circuitry is exercised by injecting and measuring signals using a Aeroflex

3900 Series Communications System Analyzer (or equivalent). Incorrect measurement values

indicate a faulty module(s); measurement values within the acceptable range verify proper operation

of the above listed modules and circuitry.

12.2.2 Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required to perform the procedure:

• Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer (or equivalent)

• Microphone (GMMN4063)

• In-Line Wattmeter (Motorola Model S-1350 or equivalent)

• Dummy Load (50 Ω, base station/repeater wattage or higher)

Note Although these radios function in digital and analog modes, all testing is done in analog

mode.

The base station/repeater needs to be taken out of service in

order to carry out performance testing procedures. Unless the

base station/repeater is already out of service, it is

recommended to perform the procedures during off-peak

hours in order to minimize disruption of service to the system

subscribers.

12-2 MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing: Verifying Transmitter Circuitry

12.2.3 Verifying Transmitter Circuitry Procedure

1. Connect and set up test equipment by performing Steps 1–5 shown in Figure 12-1.

2. Apply input power (AC or DC) to the base station/repeater. The power supply and PA fans

should both run a few seconds to confirm fan operation.

3. Press the PTT button of the microphone and observe the PA Keyed LED indicator on the

Station Control Module.

• If PA Keyed fails to light, suspect the following:

- Faulty Power Amplifier Module

- Faulty Exciter Module

- Loose or bad Exciter-to-PA RF cable

- Loose or bad PA-to-antenna RF output cable

- Improperly terminated PA RF output cable

- Faulty Station Control Module

- Faulty Power Supply Module

- Faulty Backplane Interface Board

- Faulty Antenna Relay

4. Measure output power by pressing the PTT button and observing reading on an in-line

wattmeter.

• If PA output is not at proper power (as set for particular site), adjust the output power as

described in the CPS online help.

5. If PA output power is proper, set up Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer

for spectrum analyzer display. Press the PTT button and observe the display. The display

should show a single frequency carrier:

• If the display shows multiple carriers evenly spaced about the carrier, suspect a faulty Exciter

module or PA module.

• If the display shows a solid carrier but it is off frequency, suspect the following:

- Faulty Exciter or Station Control Module

- Faulty external 5/10 MHz reference source (if used)

• If the display shows a single carrier moving erratically, suspect:

- Faulty Station Control Module

- Faulty Exciter Module

6. If display is proper, set up Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer to display

modulation. Using the microphone, push the PTT button and speak into the microphone.

Verify that the display shows an audio signal.

Note In the following steps, suspected faulty modules are ranked in order of most to least

likelihood.

LED Definition

Tx Slot 1 (for label number 1)

Tx Slot 2 (for label number 2)

MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing: Verifying Transmitter Circuitry 12-3

• If the proper display is not obtained, suspect faulty SCM or Exciter Module

7. Set the Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer for GEN/MON MTR. Press

the PTT button and speak loudly into the microphone to cause maximum deviation. Display

should read:

• 4.60 kHz maximum for a 25 kHz system

• 3.68 kHz maximum for a 20 kHz system

• 2.30 kHz maximum for a 12.5 kHz system

If the proper display is not obtained, suspect faulty SCM or Exciter Module.

8. This completes the Verifying Transmitter Circuitry test procedure. If all displays and

measurements are correct, the transmitter circuitry may be considered to be operating

properly. Remove test equipment, restore the base station/repeater to normal service, and (if

applicable) return to the troubleshooting flow chart to resume troubleshooting sequence.

12.2.3.1 Station Reset

In the event the base station/repeater is powered from a DC source and repeatedly resets:

1. Disconnect DC power to PA and connect a load to the PA Module.

2. Power the base station/repeater from an AC source instead.

3. If the base station/repeater is not resetting, there is a problem with the PA or the DC source.

If the base station/repeater is resetting, there is a problem with another module in the base

station/repeater.

4. Reconnect DC power to the PA.

5. If the base station/repeater does not reset, key the base station/repeater.

6. If the base station/repeater is resetting, it "may" be a problem with the PA, or it could be a

problem with the Exciter, or Power Supply as well.

12.2.3.2 Station Unable to Power Up with Live DC or AC mains

In the event that the base station/repeater is not powering up with live DC or AC mains present:

1. Look for the proper output voltage when the power supply is running (Refer to Section 7.4.2

on page 7-7).

2. Check the two fuses on the backplane interface board and ensure that they are not blown

(Refer to Section 6.2 on page 6-26).

Note The deviations are calculated with Relative Standard Deviation (RSD) set to 92% RSD

(rated system deviation).

12-4 MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing: Verifying Transmitter Circuitry

HELP TAB

SELECT

CANCEL

IFR 390I Digital Radio Test Set

TEST HOLD

CONFIG

UTILS ENTER

MIC / ACC GENT/RANT

RETURN

TEST PORTCH1 SCOPE CH2 1 2AUDIO INFCTN GEN / DEMOD OUT

ASSIGN

–

456

HELP

Figure 12-1 Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Transmitter Circuitry

1. Disconnect cable (N-type

connector) from transmitter

antenna at the base

station/repeater.

2. Connect an N-to-N type cable

between the base station/

repeater and the inline

wattmeter.

3. Connect the inline wattmeter

to a dummy load.

4. Connect the Service Monitor Test

Antenna to the ANT input of the

monitor. Then, using the RF IN/OUT

Softkey, configure the ports for TR/

ANT which allows monitoring of the

transmitted signal via the Aeroflex

antenna.

Dummy

Load

Inline

Wattmeter

Station

Receive Input

Station

Transmit

Output

Aeroflex 3900 Series

Communications

System Analyzer

To Receive

Antenna

Station – rear

Station – front

5. Connect microphone to RJ-45

connector (J3000) in front of

Station Control Module.

Microphone Connector on SCM

ANT input

RF IN/OUT softkey

MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing: Verifying Receiver Circuitry 12-5

12.3 Verifying Receiver Circuitry

12.3.1 Introduction

While most module faults can be detected by running the base station/repeater diagnostics, the

following procedure provides a more traditional method of troubleshooting the Receiver circuitry.

This procedure allows the service technician to make minor adjustments and verify proper operation

of the base station/repeater receive circuitry, including:

• Receiver Module

• Station Control Module

In general, the Receiver circuitry is exercised by injecting and measuring signals using a Motorola

R2001 or R2600 Communications Analyzer (or equivalent). Incorrect measurement values indicate a

faulty module(s); measurement values within the acceptable range verify proper operation of the

above listed modules and circuitry.

12.3.2 Required Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required to perform the procedure:

• Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer (or equivalent)

• Male N-type to Male N-type coaxial cable

• RJ-45 to BNC (6 feet) cable; part no. 3083191X02

• Service Speaker; part no. HSN1006

• Service Speaker adaptor cable; part no. 0185180U01

• Dummy Load (50 Ω, base station/repeater wattage or higher) required for base station/

repeaters only

Performing this procedure requires that the base station/

repeater be taken out of service. It is recommended that,

unless the base station/repeater is already out of service, this

procedure be performed during off-peak hours so as to

minimize the disruption of service to the system subscribers.

If the base station/repeater operates as a base station/

repeater, the transmit output from the base station/repeater

must be connected to a dummy load to prevent over-the-air

broadcast during Receiver testing.

12-6 MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing: Verifying Receiver Circuitry

12.3.3 Verifying Receiver Circuitry Procedure

1. Connect test equipment by performing Steps 1 to 3 shown in Figure 12-2.

2. Using the CPS, disable PL and unsquelch the Receiver such that noise is heard through the

external speaker. If no audio is heard, suspect the following:

• Faulty Receiver Module

• Faulty Station Control Module

• Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer is outputting a carrier signal without

modulation

3. Set Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer to generate a 1.0 μV (-107 dBm)

FM signal at the Receiver frequency, modulated by a 1 kHz tone at 3 kHz deviation for 25 /30

kHz channel spacing, or 1.5 kHz deviation for 12.5 kHz channel spacing. The 1 kHz tone

should be audible through the external speaker. If no audio is heard, suspect the following:

• Faulty Receiver Module

• Faulty antenna-to-Receiver preselector RF cable (for the base station/repeater with external

metal preselector)

• Faulty Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer-to-station RF cable

• Faulty Antenna Relay

• Faulty Preselector

4. If audio is heard, connect the external speaker RJ-45 jack to the Oscilloscope input BNC

connector, as shown in step 4 of Figure 12-2.

5. Using the CPS, increase the audio volume to maximum. Measure the audio level using the

Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer.

• Audio level should measure approximately 0.75 to 1.5 Vpp. If not, suspect faulty SCM.

6. Change Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer injection signal level to the

noted levels in Table 1-4.

7. Measure the Receiver 12 dB SINAD sensitivity. Set the signal strength of the communications

analyzer to the rated sensitivity according to Table 1-4.

• If the SINAD level is less than 12 dB, suspect faulty Receiver Module or SCM.

8. This completes the Verifying Receiver Circuitry test procedure. If all displays and

measurements are correct, the Receiver circuitry may be considered to be operating properly.

Remove test equipment, restore the base station/repeater to normal service, and (if

applicable) return to the troubleshooting flow chart to resume troubleshooting sequence.

Note The fault on the preselector can be verified by bypassing the filter to test whether the

Receiver meets its specifications. If it does not, refer to Section 9.5.1.1 on page 9-12 and

retest the Receiver to ensure it meets specifications.

MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing: Verifying Receiver Circuitry 12-7

HELP TAB

SELECT

CANCEL

IFR 390I Digital Radio Test Set

TEST HOLD

CONFIG

UTILS ENTER

MIC / ACC GENT/RANT

RETURN

TEST PORTCH1 SCOPE CH2 1 2AUDIO INFCTN GEN / DEMOD OUT

ASSIGN

–

456

HELP

RF In / Out

Aeroflex 3900 Series

Communications

System Analyzer

To R e c e i v e

Antenna

Figure 12-2 Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Receiver Circuit

1. Disconnect antenna cable

from N-type connector on

the base station/repeater.

3. Connect service speaker

to speaker connector on

Station Control Module.

Station – rear

Station – front

External Speaker Connector on SCM

2. Connect an N-to-N type cable between the base station/

repeater receive input and RF In / Out connector on

Aeroflex 3900 Series Communications System Analyzer.

Station Receive Input

12-8 MTR3000 Performance Check or Testing: Verifying Receiver Circuitry

HELP TAB

SELECT

CANCEL

IFR 390I Digital Radio Test Set

TEST HOLD

CONFIG

UTILS ENTER

MIC / ACC GENT/RANT

RETURN

TEST PORTCH1 SCOPE CH2 1 2AUDIO INFCTN GEN / DEMOD OUT

ASSIGN

–

456

HELP

Figure 12-3 Test Equipment Setup for Verifying Receiver Circuit (Continued)

Aeroflex 3900 Series

Communications

System Analyzer

Oscilloscope Input

Station – front

Station Receive Input

Station – rear

4. If audio is heard, connect the external speaker

RJ-45 jack to the Oscilloscope input BNC

connector.

RF In / Out

External Speaker Connector on SCM

Chapter 13 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning

13.1 Introduction

This chapter provides an overview of the MOTOTRBO Customer Programming Software (CPS) for

the MTR3000 and MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade, as well as the MOTOTRBO Tuner

application for use on Windows XPTM, Windows Vista Home PremiumTM or Windows Vista Business

EditionTM 32 bit and 64 bit operating system.

13.2 Customer Programming Software Setup

The Customer Programming Software setup, shown in Figure 13-1 is used to program the base

station/repeater. Refer to Figure 13-2 and Figure 13-3 for the actual connectors on the front and rear

panels of the base station/repeater.

Note Refer to the appropriate program on-line help files for the programming procedures.

Computer USB ports can be sensitive to Electronic Discharge. Employ

proper ESD practices (wrist strap, grounding, etc.) and do not touch

exposed contacts on cables when connected to a computer.

Figure 13-1 Customer Programming Software Setup from Rear Accessory Connector

Front Panel

USB

120 / 240 VAC

Station

Tx Port

(N-type Female)

Rx Port

(N-type Female)

AUX (J7)

28 VDC

Either One or Both

Standard Type “A” to Type “B” USB cable

Rear Panel

Computer

13-2 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Customer Programming Software Setup

Figure 13-2 Front view (without front bezel) of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

Figure 13-3 Rear view of MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

USB port

AC connector

Tx port

Rx port

DC connector

MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Base Station/Repeater Tuning Setup 13-3

13.3 Base Station/Repeater Tuning Setup

A personal computer (PC), Windows TM operating system, and the MOTOTRBO Tuner application

are required to tune the Station. To perform the tuning procedures, the base station/repeater must

be connected to the PC and test equipment setup as shown in Figure 13-4.

Figure 13-4 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater Tuning Equipment Setup

13.4 Tuning Setup (MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade)

13.4.1 MTR2000 Calibration Coefficient Entry

This feature is used to allow entry of the transmitter (Tx) output power coefficients of an MTR2000

Power Amplifier (PA) into the MTR3000 tuning codeplug.

Since an upgraded MTR2000 Base Station/Repeater does not have its PA upgraded, its PA

calibration coefficients must be entered into the tuning codeplug, as the non-upgraded MTR2000 PA

does not have an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-only Memory (EEPROM). The

calibration coefficients, which exist on a sticker on the face plate, consist of two 7 digit hexadecimal

numbers and two 6 digit hexadecimal numbers. The sticker itself is created and applied at the factory

in which the PA was calibrated.

Note Section 13.4 on page 13-3 only applies to an upgraded MTR2000 Base Station/Repeater.

Transmit

Service Monitor

or Counter

Wattmeter

20 dB Pad

Front Panel

USB

120 / 240 VAC

Station

Tx Port

(N-type Female)

AUX (J7)

28 VDC

Either One or Both

Rear Panel

Standard Type “A” to Type “B” USB cable

Computer

USB

13-4 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade)

13.4.1.1 Tuning Procedure

1. Power the Station from either an AC or DC source.

2. Launch the MOTOTRBO Tuner application on the computer.

Figure 13-5 Tx Menu tree (Tuning Procedure)

3. Click the “Read” button in the Tuner to read the current code values from the radio’s tuning

codeplug.

4. Select “Power” under the Tx menu in the tree view (Refer to Figure 13-5).

- If the returned codeplug values match the PA calibration sticker values, click the directory

tree to exit from the “Power” menu, or click the “Write” button to save the tuned power

values into the radio’s codeplug.

- If the retuned codeplug values do not match the PA calibration sticker value, proceed to

Step 5 below. Otherwise, proceed to Step 9 to exit.

5. Enter the upper left code from the PA calibration sticker to Code 1.

6. Enter the upper right code from the PA calibration sticker to Code 2.

7. Enter the lower left code from the PA calibration sticker to Code 3.

8. Enter the lower right code from the PA calibration sticker to Code 4.

9. Click the “Write” button to save the tuned power values into the radio’s codeplug.

10. Exit from the Tuner application to reset the radio. After reset, the radio will be locked.

11. To unlock the radio, launch the CPS. Read the codeplug, then write to the codeplug.

- CPS can be used to configure the codeplug prior to the write procedure (e.g. setting up

frequency)

12. Alignment is complete.

MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline) 13-5

13.4.1.2 Verification or Test Procedure for High Power

1. Power the Station from either an AC or DC source.

2. Connect the radio’s Tx antenna port, through an attenuation pad and calibrate the path loss,

to the Communication Analyzer.

3. Via the CPS, program the radio with all user frequencies supported by the base station/

repeater in analog mode.

4. Enter the test frequency into the Communication Analyzer and set the analyzer in power

meter mode.

5. Connect a Mic to the RJ45 connector at the front panel.

6. Press the PTT button on the Mic.

7. Measure the transmit power.

8. If the measured transmit power is not within the original MTR2000 specifications range, the

PA must be replaced as it cannot be calibrated in the field.

9. Repeat Step 4 to Step 7 for the remaining frequencies.

13.5 Tuning Setup (Wireline)

13.5.1 Wireline Receive Level Tuning

The procedure outlined in this section is used to set the output level on the Wireline board’s Rx path

for a given RF signal deviation on the received signal. Perform this procedure during initial Wireline

installation or any time the Rx audio level needs adjustment.

13.5.1.1 Tuning Procedure

1. Connect the radio’s receiver antenna port to the Communication Analyzer.

2. Power the base station/repeater from either an AC or DC source.

3. Launch the Tuner application and click the “Read” button to read the softpot values.

4. Select “Wireline Receive Level” under the Rx menu in the tree view (Refer to Figure 13-6).

Figure 13-6 Rx Menu tree (Wireline Receive Level)

13-6 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline)

5. Set the Communication Analyzer to output a -47 dBm RF signal modulated with a 1 kHz tone

at 60% of full deviation on the tuning frequency. The tuning frequency is the value displayed

on the Tuner GUI under the heading of “Frequency Points”.

6. Adjust the softpot value until the desired receive audio level is achieved (-30 dBm to +7 dBm)

across line two of the J6 Wireline backplane connector terminals.

7. Click “Write” to save the new tuned softpot value into the radio’s codeplug.

13.5.2 Wireline Rx Equalization – 2800 Hz Tuning

The Rx Equalization feature allows the frequency response adjustment of the Rx Audio relative to a

specified rated system deviation, to compensate (equalize) for the response of the wireline backhaul

network itself. This section outlines the procedure for high frequency adjustment. Perform this

procedure only after setting the Wireline Receive Level. Refer to Section 13.5.1 on page 13-5.

The Rx Equalizer is adjusted relative to the response at 1 kHz. Note the 1 kHz response observed

when performing the tuning procedure for Wireline Receive Level. Equalizer adjustments are

approximate. Typical adjustments range from 0 dB to approximately +6 dB.

Note The Tuner aligns this parameter in a 12.5 kHz channel spacing, so 60% is 1.5 kHz of

deviation. If the CPS is set for 25 kHz operation, the base station/repeater will automatically

scale the deviation by a factor of two when it is outside the Tuner environment.

Note Programmed TPL and DPL squelch requirements are automatically disabled for the tuning

frequency while in the Tuner environment.

Note It is imperative that the load the Wireline board is driving, matches that of the Wireline

board’s source impedance setting noted in the Tuner environment. Optimally, it is

recommended to use the actual load which is used during normal operation of the radio.

Line 2

MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline) 13-7

13.5.2.1 Tuning Procedure

1. Connect the radio’s receiver antenna port to the Communication Analyzer.

2. Power the base station/repeater from either an AC or DC source.

3. Launch the Tuner application and click the “Read” button to read the softpot values.

4. Select “Wireline Rx Equalization – 2800 Hz” under the Rx menu in the tree view (Refer to

Figure 13-7).

Figure 13-7 Rx Menu tree (Wireline Rx Equalization – 2800 Hz)

5. Set the Communication Analyzer to output a -47 dBm RF signal modulated with a 2800 Hz

tone at 60% of full deviation on the tuning frequency. The tuning frequency is the value

displayed on the Tuner GUI under the heading of “Frequency Points”.

Note The Tuner aligns this parameter in a 12.5 kHz channel spacing, so 60% is 1.5 kHz of

deviation. If the CPS is set for 25 kHz operation, the base station/repeater will automatically

scale the deviation by a factor of two when it is outside the Tuner environment.

Note The emphasis setting of the Communication Analyzer must be turned off for this alignment

procedure.

Note Programmed TPL and DPL squelch requirements are automatically disabled for the tuning

frequency while in the Tuner environment.

13-8 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline)

6. Adjust the softpot value until the best equalization is achieved across line two of the J6

Wireline backplane connector terminals. Best equalization is achieved when the far side of

the Wireline cable measures a flat response across the upper region of the audio spectrum.

Compare the response at 2800 Hz with the response measured at 1000 Hz. The values

should be approximately equal.

7. Click “Write” to save the new tuned softpot value into the radio’s codeplug.

Note It is imperative that the load the Wireline board is driving, matches that of the Wireline

board’s source impedance setting noted in the Tuner environment. Optimally, it is

recommended to use the actual load which is used during normal operation of the radio.

Line 2

MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline) 13-9

13.5.3 Wireline Rx Equalization – 400 Hz Tuning

The Rx Equalization feature allows the frequency response adjustment of the Rx Audio relative to a

specified rated system deviation, to compensate (equalize) for the response of the Wireline backhaul

network itself. This section outlines the procedure for low frequency adjustment. Perform this

procedure only after setting the Wireline Receive Level. Refer to Section 13.5.1 on page 13-5.

The Rx Equalizer is adjusted relative to the response at 1 kHz. Note the 1 kHz response observed

when performing the tuning procedure for Wireline Receive Level. Equalizer adjustments are

approximate. Typical adjustments range from 0 dB to approximately +6 dB.

13.5.3.1 Tuning Procedure

1. Connect the radio’s receiver antenna port to the Communication Analyzer.

2. Power the base station/repeater from either an AC or DC source.

3. Launch the Tuner application and click the “Read” button to read the softpot values.

4. Select “Wireline Rx Equalization – 400 Hz” under the Rx menu in the tree view (Refer to

Figure 13-8).

Figure 13-8 Rx Menu tree (Wireline Rx Equalization – 400 Hz)

5. Set the Communication Analyzer to output a -47 dBm RF signal modulated with a 400 Hz

tone at 60% of full deviation on the tuning frequency. The tuning frequency is the value

displayed on the Tuner GUI under the heading of “Frequency Points”.

Note The Tuner aligns this parameter in a 12.5 kHz channel spacing, so 60% is 1.5 kHz of

deviation. If the CPS is set for 25 kHz operation, the base station/repeater will automatically

scale the deviation by a factor of two when it is outside the Tuner environment.

Note The emphasis setting of the Communication Analyzer must be turned off for this alignment

procedure.

Note Programmed TPL and DPL squelch requirements are automatically disabled for the tuning

frequency while in the Tuner environment.

13-10 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline)

6. Adjust the softpot value until the best equalization is achieved across line two of the J6

Wireline backplane connector terminals. Best equalization is achieved when the far side of

the Wireline cable measures a flat response across the lower region of the audio spectrum.

Compare the response at 400Hz with the response measured at 1000 Hz. The values should

be approximately equal.

7. Click “Write” to save the new tuned softpot value into the radio’s codeplug.

13.5.4 Wireline Transmit Level Tuning

The procedure outlined in this section is used to adjust the level the Wireline is expecting on the Tx

pair of the J6 Wireline connector. Adjusting the expected level has the effect of increasing or

decreasing RF signal deviation for a given Wireline Tx audio level. Perform this procedure during

initial Wireline installation or any time the Tx audio level needs adjustment.

13.5.4.1 Tuning Procedure

1. Connect the radio’s transmitter antenna port to the Communication Analyzer.

2. Power the base station/repeater from either an AC or DC source.

3. Apply a 1 kHz signal at the desired input level (-36 dBm to +4 dBm) to the J6 Wireline

backplane connector terminals. This signal is known as “Test Tone” and corresponds with the

level of average voice. Optimally, it is recommended to use the actual source which is used

during normal operation of the radio to provide the signal.

4. Launch the Tuner application and click the “Read” button to read the softpot values.

Note It is imperative that the load the Wireline board is driving, matches that of the Wireline

board’s source impedance setting noted in the Tuner environment. Optimally, it is

recommended to use the actual load which is used during normal operation of the radio.

Note Most Motorola dispatch consoles can generate a 1 kHz tone at the correct level by using the

“Alert Tone” feature. Consult the appropriate console manual for more information.

Note If the Wire Mode is set for 2 Wire operation, then inject the signal into the line two terminals

of connector J6. Otherwise, inject the signal into the line one terminals of J6.

Line 2

Line 1

MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline) 13-11

5. Select “Wireline Transmit Level” under the Tx menu in the tree view (Refer to Figure 13-9).

Figure 13-9 Tx Menu tree (Wireline Transmit Level)

6. Enter the tuning frequency into the Communication Analyzer (the value displayed on the

Tuner GUI under the heading of “Frequency Points”).

7. Click the “PTT Toggle” button within the Tuner environment to key up the radio.

8. Adjust the softpot value until 60% of the rated system deviation (RSD) is achieved.

9. Click the “PTT Toggle” button within the Tuner environment to de-key the radio.

10. Click “Write” to save the new tuned softpot value into the radio’s codeplug.

Note If enabled, the Wireline’s Automatic Level Control (ALC) and Wireline Squelch Hysteresis

features are automatically turned off when the radio is keyed up from the “PTT Toggle”

button within the Tuner environment. The features are automatically re-enabled when the

radio is de-keyed by pressing the “PTT Toggle” button or when leaving the Tuner

environment.

Note The Tuner aligns this parameter in a 12.5 kHz channel spacing, so 60% is 1.5 kHz of

deviation. If the CPS is set for 25 kHz operation, the base station/repeater will automatically

scale the deviation by a factor of two when it is outside the Tuner environment.

13-12 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline)

13.5.5 Wireline Squelch Level Tuning

The Wireline Squelch feature is used to mute Wireline Tx audio when the audio level falls below a

designated threshold. The procedure in this section is used to set the nominal squelch threshold. An

additional hysteresis value can be added to the nominal squelch threshold by adjusting the “Squelch

Hysteresis” setting in the Wireline configuration options of the CPS tool.

The Wireline Squelch level is adjusted relative to the expected audio level for High Level Guard

Tone. This is true regardless of the Remote Control method selected. The expected level of High

Level Guard Tone is 6 dB above the “Test Tone” level used during the Wireline Transmit Level tuning

procedure of Section 13.5.4 on page 13-10.

13.5.5.1 Tuning Procedure

1. Connect the radio’s transmitter antenna port to the Communication Analyzer.

2. Power the base station/repeater from either an AC or DC source.

3. Apply a 1 kHz signal, at the desired squelch threshold, to the J6 Wireline backplane

connector terminals. Optimally, it is recommended to use the actual source which is used

during normal operation of the radio to provide the signal.

4. Launch the Tuner application and click the “Read” button to read the softpot values.

Note This calibration procedure should be performed after adjusting the Wireline Transmit Level.

Refer to Section 13.5.4 on page 13-10.

Note It is possible to set the Wireline Squelch threshold higher than the level of average voice.

Setting the Squelch threshold too high can result in unintended audio drop-outs or no audio

at all.

Note If the Wire Mode is set for 2 Wire operation, then inject the signal into the line two terminals

of connector J6. Otherwise, inject the signal into the line one terminals of J6. In addition, the

Wire Mode used must be the same configuration as that was used in the Wireline Transmit

Level alignment in Section 13.5.4 on page 13-10.

Line 2

Line 1

MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Tuning Setup (Wireline) 13-13

5. Select “Wireline Squelch Level” under the Tx menu in the tree view (Refer to Figure 13-10).

Figure 13-10 Tx Menu tree (Wireline Squelch Level)

6. Enter the tuning frequency into the Communication Analyzer (the value displayed on the

Tuner GUI under the heading of “Frequency Points”).

7. Click the backplane “PTT Toggle” button within the Tuner environment to key up the radio.

8. Adjust the softpot value until the Communication Analyzer indicates that the deviation has

dropped out (< 100 Hz of deviation).

9. Click the “PTT Toggle” button within the Tuner environment to de-key the radio.

10. Click “Write” to save the new tuned softpot value into the radio’s codeplug.

Note If enabled, the Wireline’s Automatic Level Control (ALC) and Wireline Squelch Hysteresis

features are automatically turned off when the radio is keyed up from the “PTT Toggle”

button within the Tuner environment. The features are automatically re-enabled when the

radio is de-keyed by pressing the “PTT Toggle” button or when leaving the Tuner

environment.

Note The Wireline's Automatic Level Control (ALC) alignment procedure can result in a difference

between the Wireline Squelch Threshold set during this procedure and the actual value

observed in normal operation. This difference can be eliminated or minimized, by carefully

following the Wireline Transmit Level tuning procedure found in Section 13.5.4 on page 13-

10 to obtain an accurate alignment.

13-14 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Modulation Limit Alignment

13.6 Modulation Limit Alignment

This feature is to set the modulation limit of the radio for MTR3000 and MTR2000 MOTOTRBO

Digital Upgrade.

13.6.1 Tuning Procedure (with no Tx Data and no PL)

1. Connect the radio’s antenna port to the attenuation pad, if necessary, before connecting to

the Communication Analyzer.

2. Power the base station/repeater from either an AC or DC source.

3. Apply a 1 kHz signal at 1.2 Vrms to Pin 1 of the J7 backplane connector.

- Signal ground is Pin 9 of the J7 backplane connector.

4. Launch the Tuner application and click the “Read” button to read the softpot values.

5. Select “Modulation Limit” under the Tx menu in the tree view (Refer to Figure 13-11).

Figure 13-11 Tx Menu tree (Tuning Procedure with no Tx data)

6. Enter the tuning frequency into the Communication Analyzer (the value displayed on the

Tuner GUI).

7. Click the “PTT Toggle” button within the Tuner environment to key up the radio.

Note A modulation limit alignment is not needed if the radio is used in repeat mode. This is

always the case when the radio is in digital mode.

Note 1. Under the “Accessories” menu within the CPS, if the “Audio Type” is set to “Rx & Tx

Filtered Squelch” and the “Analog Accessory Emphasis” is set to “De & Pre”, then a

modulation limit alignment is not needed. In this configuration, the modulation limit is

always set to 92% RSD by the base station/repeater software.

2. If data or PL signaling is applied to Pin 13 of the J7 connector, proceed to Section 13.6.3

on page 13-16.

MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Modulation Limit Alignment 13-15

8. Adjust the softpot value until the maximum deviation is 92% of the rated system deviation

(RSD). This will be tested in a 12.5 kHz channel spacing, so 92% of 2.5 kHz is 2.3 kHz.

9. Click the “PTT Toggle” button within the Tuner environment to de-key the radio.

10. Click “Write” to save the new tuned softpot value into the radio’s codeplug.

13.6.2 Verification (with no Tx Data and no PL)

1. Connect the radio’s antenna port to the attenuation pad, if necessary, before connecting to

the Communication Analyzer.

2. Power the base station/repeater from either an AC or DC source.

3. Via CPS, program the radio with any frequency within the specified range of the base station/

repeater under test, and set the radio for low power and disable the repeat path.

4. Apply a 1 kHz signal at 1.2 Vrms to Pin 1 of the J7 backplane connector.

- Signal ground is Pin 9 of the J7 backplane connector.

5. Key up the radio and measure the deviation

- Key the radio by grounding Pin 2 of the J7 backplane connector.

- CPS must have Pin 2 configured as an active low with the PTT function.

6. De-key the radio.

The deviation shall meet the limits shown in the table below.

Note Set the modulation limit to 92% so that any additional deviation incurred by the transmitter

VCOs over temperature is compensated for.

Channel Spacing RSD 92% of RSD Tolerance

12.5 kHz 2.5 kHz 2.3 kHz +0Hz / -50Hz

Channel Spacing

Relative

Standard

Deviation

(RSD)

92% of RSD Tolerance

12.5 kHz 2.5 kHz 2.3 kHz +0Hz / -50Hz

20.0 kHz 4.0 kHz 3.68 kHz +0Hz / -80Hz

25.0 kHz 5.0 kHz 4.6 kHz +0Hz / -100Hz

Note The base station/repeater will be factory-tuned in accordance to the above procedure and

specification.

13-16 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Modulation Limit Alignment

13.6.3 Tuning Procedure (with Tx Data or PL)

1. Connect the radio’s antenna port to the attenuation pad, if necessary, before connecting to

the Communication Analyzer.

2. Turn on the base station/repeater using an AC or DC source.

3. Click the “Read” button on the Tuner application to read the radio’s softpot values.

4. Select “Modulation Limit” under the Tx menu in the tree view.

5. Enter the tuning frequency into the Communication Analyzer (the value displayed by the

Tuner application).

6. Click the “PTT Toggle” button within the Tuner environment to key up the radio.

7. Apply a 1 kHz signal at 1.2Vrms to Pin 22 of the J7 backplane connector.

- Signal ground is Pin 9 of the J7 backplane connector.

- If the manufacturer of the third party controller specifies that the Tx Audio is not to be pre-

emphasized, use Pin 1 instead of Pin 22.

8. Adjust the Modulation Limit softpot to a value that limits the maximum deviation to “X”% RSD,

where “X” is equal to “92% RSD” minus “Tx Data’s % RSD”.

E.g. If Tx Data deviation is equal to 17%,

X = 92% - 17% = 75% as the maximum deviation limit.

Figure 13-12 Example of maximum deviation limit calculation

9. Click the “PTT Toggle” button within the Tuner environment to de-key the radio.

10. Click “Write” to save the newly tuned softpot value into the radio’s codeplug.

11. Alignment is complete.

Note Refer to Figure 5-2 for details regarding the audio and data flow.

Note Set the modulation limit to 92% to compensate for any additional deviation incurred by the

transmitter VCOs over temperature.

Note The Tuner application always aligns the Modulation Limit parameter in a 12.5 kHz channel

spacing regardless of the CPS setting, so calculate the tuning % RSD accordingly. If the

CPS is set for 25 kHz operation, the base station/repeater will automatically scale the

deviation by a factor of two when outside of the Tuner environment.

17%

75%

100%

%RSD 92%

With Tx Data or PL

Buffer

Data or PL

Voice

MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Modulation Limit Alignment 13-17

13.6.4 Verification (with Tx Data or PL)

Refer to Section 13.6.2 on page 13-15 with the following exceptions:

• The same Tx data signal level determined (obtained from Step 8 in Section 13.6.3 on page 13-

16), is applied to Pin 13 during the validation process.

• Pin 22 may be used instead of Pin 1, depending on the recommendation by the manufacturer of

the third party controller.

Notes

13-18 MTR3000 Programming and Tuning: Modulation Limit Alignment

Chapter 14 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/

Reassembly

14.1 Introduction

This chapter provides details about the following:

• Routine maintenance

• Preventive maintenance (inspection and cleaning)

• Safe handling of Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) devices

• Disassembly and reassembly of the base station/repeater

• Repair procedures and techniques.

14.2 Routine Maintenance

The base station/repeater and ancillary equipment have been designed with state-of-the-art

technology and operate under software control, thus requiring minimal routine maintenance. Virtually

all base station/repeater operating parameters are monitored and self-corrected by the Station

Control Module (SCM) and the firmware it runs, which makes adjustments and tuning virtually

unnecessary.

Provided that the equipment is installed in an area which meets the specified environmental

requirements, the only routine maintenance task required is the calibration of the base station/

repeater reference oscillator circuit.

14.3 Preventive Maintenance

Periodic visual inspection and cleaning is recommended.

14.3.1 Inspection

Check that the external surfaces of the base station/repeater are clean, and that all external controls

and connections are in order. It is not recommended to inspect the interior electronic circuitry.

14.3.2 Cleaning Procedures

The following procedures describe the recommended cleaning agents and the methods to be used

when cleaning the external and internal surfaces of the repeater. External surfaces include the top

cover and repeater enclosure.

Periodically clean smudges and grime from exterior enclosure. Use a soft, non-abrasive cloth

moistened in a 0.5% solution of mild dishwashing detergent and water solution. Rinse the surface

using a second cloth moistened in clean water, and clean any dirt or debris from the fan grill and

louvers on the front side.

Note It is recommended that the base station/repeater is cleaned with a soft dry cloth while in

service.

14-2 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Preventive Maintenance

The only factory recommended liquid for cleaning the printed circuit boards and their components is

isopropyl alcohol (100% by volume).

Cleaning Internal Circuit Boards and Components

Isopropyl alcohol (100%) may be applied with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush to dislodge

embedded or caked materials located in hard-to-reach areas. The brush stroke should direct the

dislodged material out and away from the inside of the base station/repeater. Make sure that

controls or tunable components are not soaked with alcohol. Do not use high-pressure air to hasten

the drying process since this could cause the liquid to collect in unwanted places. Once the cleaning

process is complete, use a soft, absorbent, lintless cloth to dry the area. Do not brush or apply any

isopropyl alcohol to the top cover and base station/repeater enclosure.

14.3.3 Station Reference Alignment Procedure

The base station/repeater reference needs to be aligned yearly to maintain optimum functionality.

To align the base station/repeater reference:

1. Remove the front bezel of the base station/repeater.

2. Connect the External Reference to J3008M7 of the SCM. SCM accepts 5 MHz or 10 MHz

sine or square wave with 3V peak-to-peak.

3. The reference LED on the SCM will turn solid amber to indicate that the alignment is in

progress.

4. The reference LED on the SCM will turn solid green to indicate that the alignment is

completed successfully.

5. Remove the External Reference from J3008M7, and the reference LED will turn off.

6. Replace the front bezel of the base station/repeater.

Note Internal surfaces should be cleaned only when the base station/repeater is disassembled

for service or repair.

Note Always use a fresh supply of alcohol and a clean container to prevent contamination by

dissolved material (from previous usage).

The 800/900 MHz base station/repeater must be in a powered

state (AC/DC applied) for a minimum of 10 minutes prior to

applying an external reference for the purpose of alignment.

Failure to comply to the 10 minutes wait time will result in an

inaccurate reference frequency alignment.

W A R N I N G

MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Safe Handling of CMOS Devices 14-3

14.4 Safe Handling of CMOS Devices

Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) devices are used in this family of stations, and

are susceptible to damage by electrostatic or high voltage charges. Damage can be latent, resulting

in failures occurring weeks or months later. Therefore, special precautions must be taken to prevent

device damage during disassembly, troubleshooting, and repair.

Handling precautions are mandatory for CMOS circuits and are especially important in low humidity

conditions.

DO NOT attempt to disassemble the base station/repeater without first referring to the following

CAUTION statement.

This base station/repeater contains static-sensitive devices. Do not open the base

station/repeater unless you are properly grounded. Take the following precautions

when working on this unit:

• Store and transport all CMOS devices in conductive material so

that all exposed leads are shorted together. Do not insert CMOS

devices into conventional plastic “snow” trays used for storage

and transportation of other semiconductor devices.

• Ground the working surface of the service bench to protect the

CMOS device. We recommend using a wrist strap, two ground

cords, a table mat, and a floor mat.

• Wear a conductive wrist strap in series with a 100k resistor to

ground (replacement wrist straps that connect to the bench top

covering can be ordered using the Motorola part number

4280385A59).

• Do not wear nylon clothing while handling CMOS devices.

• Do not insert or remove CMOS devices with power applied.

Check all power supplies used for testing CMOS devices to be

certain that there are no voltage transients present.

• When straightening CMOS Pins, provide ground straps for the

apparatus used.

• When soldering, use a grounded soldering iron.

• Where possible, handle CMOS devices by the package and not

by the leads. Prior to touching the unit, touch an electrical ground

to remove any static charge that you may have accumulated. The

package and substrate may be electrically common. If so, the

reaction of a discharge to the case would cause the same

damage as touching the leads.

C a u t i o n

14-4 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Repair Procedures and Techniques – General

14.5 Repair Procedures and Techniques – General

Any rework or repair on RoHS-compliant products must be done using the appropriate lead-free

solder wire and lead-free solder paste as stated in the following table:

Parts Replacement and Substitution

When damaged parts are replaced, identical parts should be used. If the identical replacement part

is not locally available, check the parts list for the proper Motorola part number and order the part

from the nearest Motorola Radio Products and Solutions Organization listed in the respective

Appendix chapters in this manual.

Rigid Circuit Boards

This base station/repeater uses bonded, multi-layer, printed circuit boards. Since the inner layers are

not accessible, some special considerations are required when soldering and unsoldering

components. The printed-through holes may interconnect multiple layers of the printed circuit.

Therefore, exercise care to avoid pulling the plated circuit out of the hole.

When soldering near a connector:

• Avoid accidentally getting solder in the connector

• Be careful not to form solder bridges between the connector Pins

• Examine your work closely for shorts due to solder bridges.

Note The Motorola MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater system and its subsystems

have been created in compliance with the environmental goals of the European Union’s

Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) and the Waste Electrical and Electronic

Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC as well as Motorola’s corporate goals to

minimize environmental impact of its products.

This Motorola policy is reflected throughout the entire design, procurement, assembly, and

packaging process.

In support of these efforts to provide environmentally-responsible products, please comply

with the information in the following sections regarding any rework or repair on RoHS-

compliant products.

Table 14-1 Lead Free Solder Wire Part Number List

Motorola

Part Number Alloy Flux Type Flux Content

by Weight

Melting

Point

Supplier Part

number Diameter Weight

1088929Y01 95.5Sn/3.8Ag/0.7Cu RMAVersion 2.7-3.2% 217C 52171 0.015 1lb spool

Table 14-2 Lead Free Solder Paste Part Number List

Motorola Part

Number

Manufacturer Part

Number Viscosity Type Composition & Percent Metal Liquid

Temperature

1085674C03 NC-SMQ230 900-1000KCPs

Brookfield (5rpm)

Type 3

(-325/+500)

(95.5%Sn-3.8%Ag-0.7%Cu)

89.3%

217°C

Note MTR3000 Power Amplifier with Solder Wire Part Number 1010041C24 and Solder Paste

Part Number 1010041C20 uses leaded solder.

MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – General 14-5

14.6 Disassembly and Reassembly – General

Station modules suspected of being faulty must be replaced with known good modules to restore the

base station/repeater to proper operation. The following are typical procedures to remove each of

the base station/repeater modules.

1. Power cord (and battery backup power, if used) and all external cables must be disconnected

before opening up base station/repeater. Label each removed cable as required to ensure it

is properly reconnected.

2. Take the proper grounding precautions as stated in Section 14.4 on page 14-3.

3. When disassembling base station/repeater, retain all screws for reuse.

The following tools are required for disassembly and reassembly the base station/repeater:

• Small Flat Blade Screwdriver

• Torque Drivers (T10, T15 and T20). Refer to Section 14.10 on page 14-17 for the different

size fasteners of screw torques.

•Cable Ties

• Hand-held tool/Side Cutters to cut Cable Ties

If a unit requires more complete testing or service than is customarily performed at the basic level,

send the base station/repeater or FRU to a Motorola Service Center.

The following disassembly procedures should be performed only if necessary.

14.7 Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed

14.7.1 Front Bezel Disassembly and Reassembly

1. Remove the base station/repeater front bezel from its chassis locking clip by carefully pulling

it forward (Refer to Figure 14-1).

Figure 14-1 Removing Front Bezel

2. Replace the base station/repeater front bezel by inserting one of the front bezel locking clips

into corresponding latch on the base station/repeater housing, and carefully pressing the

panel on the opposite side until the second locking clip snaps into place.

Chassis

locking clip

14-6 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed

14.7.2 Module Disassembly and Reassembly

14.7.2.1 Fans

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Remove the four screws securing the fans to Power Supply or the five screws to the PA

casting (Refer to Figure 14-2 and Figure 14-3).

Figure 14-2 Removing five screws from PA fan

Figure 14-3 Removing four screws from PS fan

3. Make sure of the connector orientation and unplug the fan electrical power connector.

4. Lift the fan away from the casting.

5. Ensure that the correct fan is being installed.

MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed 14-7

6. Position the fan on the casting and position the fan grill over the fan.

7. Secure the fan to the Power Supply casting with the four screws or PA casting with the five

screws.

8. Orient the connector as before and push the power connector into the plug on the casting.

9. Restore power to the base station/repeater and ensure the fan runs briefly at power-on.

14.7.2.2 Power Amplifier Module

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Remove the base station/repeater from the rack or cabinet.

3. If the base station/repeater is equipped with an External Preselector, label and disconnect the

corresponding RF coax cables to the Preselector and remove the screws securing the

Preselector to the base station/repeater.

4. Remove the two screws securing the battery backup connector to the PA casting.

5. Disconnect the Exciter-to-PA coaxial cable from the PA module (Refer to Figure 14-4) by

pushing in on the outer ring and turning.

Figure 14-4 Removing two cables from the front

6. Remove the six screws securing the top and bottom plates to the PA Cover.

7. Ensure that the correct PA Module is being installed.

8. Install the replacement PA Module.

9. Line up holes in the PA cover with the corresponding holes in the top and bottom plates.

10. Secure the PA Module to the casting with the six screws.

11. Reconnect all cables.

12. Secure the battery backup connector to the PA casting.

13. Replace the optional Preselector with the two screws and reconnect the cables.

14. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

Note The PA and PS fans have different fan terminations. The PA fan has a fifth screw to

terminate its ground wire.

Note When the PA fan is replaced, it is recommend to replace the PS fan as well since the PS fan

is not alarmed upon its failure.

Exciter-to-PA

Coaxial Cable

Rx Input Cable

14-8 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed

14.7.2.3 Power Supply Module

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Remove the base station/repeater from the rack or cabinet.

3. If the base station/repeater is equipped with an External Preselector and/or Antenna Relay,

label and disconnect the corresponding RF coax cables to the Preselector and/or Antenna

Relay. Then remove the screws securing Preselector and/or Antenna Relay to the base

station/repeater.

4. Remove the two screws securing the battery backup connector to PA casting.

5. Disconnect all cables (Refer to Figure 14-5), as follows:

- Backplane Interface Board Power Cable

- PA Power Cable

- DC Input Cable

Figure 14-5 Removing three cables from the back

6. Remove the six screws securing the top and bottom plates to the Power Supply casting and

remove the Power Supply Module (Refer to Figure 14-6).

Backplane Power Cable

PA Power Cable

DC Input Cable

MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed 14-9

Figure 14-6 Removing Top and Bottom Plates

7. Ensure that the correct Power Supply Module is being installed.

8. Install the replacement Power Supply Module.

9. Line up the holes in the Power Supply casting with the corresponding holes in the top and

bottom plates.

10. Secure the Power Supply Module to the casting with the six screws.

11. Reconnect all the cables and peripherals (if installed).

12. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

14.7.2.4 Exciter Module

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Disconnect the following cables (Refer to Figure 14-4):

- Rx cable from Receiver Module

- Exciter-to-PA coaxial cable

3. Remove the two screws holding the transceiver assembly to the bottom plate.

4. Pull forward on the cast knobs (above the front panel that projects horizontally from the

Exciter and Receiver module), carefully slide the transceiver assembly (Exciter Module,

Receiver Module, Station Control Module (SCM)) out of base station/repeater (Refer to

Figure 14-7).

Top Plate

Bottom Plate

14-10 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed

Figure 14-7 Sliding Station Control transceiver assembly out

5. Remove the four screws securing the Exciter Module to the transceiver assembly and

disconnect the Exciter Module from the Station Control Module (SCM).

6. Ensure that the correct Exciter Module is being installed.

7. Install the replacement Exciter Module by plugging the module into the connector on the

SCM, replacing four screws, and sliding the transceiver assembly back into the base station/

repeater (along the guide rails) to mate with the connector on the backplane interface board.

8. Reconnect all the cables.

9. Fasten the transceiver assembly into unit using two screws.

10. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

Note Do not slam the base station/repeater control transceiver assembly against the backplane

interface board or push any harder than necessary to seat the connector.

Transceiver assembly

Cast knob

MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed 14-11

14.7.2.5 Station Control Module

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Disconnect the cables, as follows:

- Rx cable from Receiver Module

- Exciter-to-PA coaxial Cable

3. Remove the two screws holding the transceiver assembly to the bottom plate.

4. Pull forward on the cast knobs (above the front panel that projects horizontally from the

Exciter and Receiver module), carefully slide the transceiver assembly (Exciter Module,

Receiver Module, Station Control Module (SCM)) out of the base station/repeater (Refer to

Figure 14-7).

5. Remove four screws securing Exciter Module, and four screws securing Receiver Module to

the SCM, and disconnect both modules from the SCM (Refer to Figure 14-8).

Figure 14-8 Removing screws securing Exciter Module, Receiver Module and SCM

6. Ensure that the correct Station Control Module is being installed.

7. Install the replacement Station Control Module by plugging the Exciter Module and the

Receiver Module into the respective connectors on the new SCM. Tighten the screws and

slide the transceiver assembly back into the base station/repeater (along the guide rails) to

mate with the connector on the backplane interface board.

8. Reconnect all the cables.

9. Fasten the transceiver assembly into the unit using the two screws.

10. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

Note If the Station Control Module is replaced, please contact the Motorola System Support

Center to obtain the updated License Key if any premium features were purchased and

refer to the “Purchasing Radio Features” section in the Online Help of the Customer

Programming Software (CPS) for further details.

Note Do not slam the transceiver assembly against the backplane interface board or push any

harder than necessary to seat the connector.

14-12 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed

14.7.2.6 Receiver Module

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Disconnect all the cables, as follows:

- Rx cable from Rx Module

- Exciter-to-PA coaxial cable

3. Remove the two screws holding the transceiver assembly to bottom plate.

4. Pull forward on the cast knobs (above the front panel that projects horizontally from the

Exciter and Receiver module), carefully slide the transceiver assembly (Exciter Module,

Receiver Module, Station Control Module (SCM)) out of the base station/repeater.

5. Remove the four screws securing the Receiver Module to the transceiver assembly and

disconnect Receiver Module from the Station Control Module (SCM).

6. Ensure that the correct Receiver Module is being installed.

7. Install the replacement Receiver Module by plugging the module into the connector on SCM,

replacing four screws, and sliding the transceiver assembly back into the base station/

repeater (along the guide rails) to mate with the connector on the backplane interface board.

8. Reconnect all cables.

9. Fasten the transceiver assembly into the unit with the two screws.

10. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

14.7.2.7 External Preselector Module

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Disconnect cable to Receiver antenna connection and cable to Receiver Module.

3. Remove the two screws securing External Preselector to the back of the base station/

repeater.

4. Ensure that the correct External Preselector is being installed.

5. Install the replacement External Preselector by reconnecting the two cables and secure the

External Preselector to the base station/repeater with the two screws.

6. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

14.7.2.8 Backplane Interface Board

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Disconnect all cables (Refer to Figure 14-5), as follows:

- Backplane Interface Board Power Cable

- PA Power Cable

- DC Input Cable

3. Pull forward on transceiver assembly pull tabs, carefully slide the transceiver assembly

(Exciter Module, Receiver Module, Station Control Module (SCM)) out of the base station/

repeater.

Note Do not slam the transceiver assembly against the backplane interface board or push any

harder than necessary to seat the connector.

MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed 14-13

4. If the base station/repeater is equipped with an External Preselector, label and disconnect the

corresponding RF coax cables to the Preselector and remove the screws securing the

Preselector to the base station/repeater.

5. If the base station/repeater is equipped with an antenna relay, disconnect the control and

coaxial cables and remove the screws securing relay to the base station/repeater.

6. Remove the DC Input cable from the base station/repeater.

7. Disconnect and remove the cable ties from all cables connected to PA module.

8. Remove the ribbon cable and Wireline connector from the backplane interface board metal

shield (Refer to Figure 14-9).

Figure 14-9 Removing ribbon cable and Wireline connector

9. Remove the four screws which secure the metal shield and the backplane interface board to

the top and bottom plates (Refer to Figure 14-10).

Figure 14-10 Removing metal shield/metal cover

Note Label all cables before disconnecting them.

Linear Regulator Screws

Wireline connector

Ribbon cable

connector

14-14 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Disassembly and Reassembly – Detailed

10. Remove the backplane interface board shield.

11. Remove the two linear regulator screws (Refer to Figure 14-10) at the bottom centre of the

backplane interface board.

12. Place the backplane interface board to the side.

13. Ensure the correct backplane interface board is being installed.

14. Install the replacement backplane interface board and shield with the six screws.

15. Reconnect all the cables which were removed previously according to the disassembly steps

(Refer to step 2 to step 8).

16. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

14.7.2.9 Wireline Interface Board

1. Make sure the base station/repeater power is turned off at the breaker to the AC or DC

source.

2. Ensure that an ESD cable is connected to the base station/repeater.

3. Remove the Wireline Interface Board from the top option card slot by carefully pulling it

straight out from the base station/repeater (BR). Use the Option Card tool (part #

6683334X01) to pull the card out. Make sure that the board is placed on properly grounded

anti-static surface.

4. Set the 2-wire and 4-wire DC Remote control jumpers on the replacement board to match

those on the faulty board.

5. Install the replacement Wireline Interface Board by sliding the board into top option card slot,

and firmly seating the board Euro-card connector into the mating backplane interface board

connector. (Do not slam the board against the backplane interface board or push any harder

than necessary to seat the connectors).

6. Affix the provided Part 68 label to the area noted in Figure 14-11 (if not already present).

Figure 14-11 Location to affix the Part 68 label

7. Restore power to the base station/repeater.

To control the amount of preload and to prevent under or over

torque, refer to Section 14.10 on page 14-17 (Backplane M3

screws) for the size fastener of screw torque to be applied on

the two linear regulator screws.

Note The Part 68 label is supplied if the MTR3000 Wireline Card is ordered as an option with the

MTR3000 base station/repeater.

C a u t i o n

Designated area

MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Exploded Mechanical View 14-15

14.8 Exploded Mechanical View

Figure 14-12 MTR3000 Assembly Exploded View

14-16 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Parts List

14.9 Parts List

Table 14-3 MTR3000 Exploded View Parts List

Item No. Description Part Number

1Top/Bottom Chassis Plate 15009086001

2 Option Card Bracket 0782635X03

3 Auxiliary I/O Board (FRU)*CLN1206_

4 4-wire Wireline Board DLN6720_

5Backplane Interface Board CLN8499_

6 Backplane Interface Board Shield 26009131001

7 Fan Grille (Power Amplifier or Power

Supply)

1383852R01

8 Power Amplifier Fan 59009254002

9 Power Amplifier (FRU) Refer to Section A.1.2 on page A-4

10 Receiver Module (FRU) Refer to Section A.1.2 on page A-4

11 Station Control Module (FRU) Refer to Section A.1.2 on page A-4

12 Station Control Module Front Panel 64009266001

13 Front Bezel 6475414H01

14 Exciter Module (FRU) Refer to Section A.1.2 on page A-4

15 Power Supply Fan 59009254001

16 Power Supply (FRU) DLN6707_

Note (*) Not available for the 800/900 MHz band.

MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Torque Chart 14-17

14.10 Torque Chart

Table 14-4 lists the various screws by description and torque values in different units of measure.

Torque all screws to the recommended value when assembling the base station/repeater.

Table 14-4 Torque Specifications for Nuts and Screws

Assembly Description Bit Size

Torque

N-m lbs-in kg-cm

Exciter M4 screws T20 2.8 25 28.8

Receiver

Station Control Module

Power Amplifier

Base Radio M4 screws T20 2.3 20 23.0

Backplane M4 screws T20 2.3 20 23.0

Power Amplifier M3.5 screws T15 1.7 15 17.3

Power Amplifier M3 screws T10 1.1 10 11.5

Base Radio M3 screws T10 1.1 17 11.5

Backplane M3 screws T10 1.1 17 11.5

14-18 MTR3000 Maintenance and Disassembly/Reassembly: Torque Chart

Notes

Appendix A Accessories

A.1 Introduction

Motorola provides the following approved accessories to improve the productivity of your base

station/repeater.

For a list of Motorola-approved accessories, visit the following web site:

http://www.motorola.com/governmentandenterprise

A.1.1 MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Ordering Guideline

A.1.1.1 Base Station/Repeater

A.1.1.2 Frequency

A.1.1.3 Duplexer

Model Description

T3000 MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater

Model Description

X340MT UHF 100W Power (403–470 MHz)

X540MT UHF 100W Power (470–524 MHz)

X450MT 800 MHz 100W Power (806–870 MHz)

X460MT 900 MHz 100W Power (896–940 MHz)

Model Description

X182UL UHF Duplexer (403–435 MHz)

X182UM UHF Duplexer (435–470 MHz)

X182UN UHF Duplexer (470–494 MHz)

X182UH UHF Duplexer (494–512 MHz)

X182EB 800 MHz Duplexer

A-2 Accessories: Introduction

A.1.1.4 Preselector

A.1.1.5 Dual Circulator

A.1.1.6 Antenna Relay

A.1.1.7 Power Cables

A.1.1.8 Mounting Hardware

A.1.1.9 Manual

Model Description

X265UL UHF Preselector (380–435 MHz)

X265UM UHF Preselector (435–470 MHz)

X265UH UHF Preselector (470–524 MHz)

Note Required in the UHF band if ordering the X182, Duplexer.

Model Description

X676UL UHF Circulator (403–470 MHz)

X676UH UHF Circulator (470–524 MHz)

X676EB 800 MHz Circulator

Model Description

X371BA Antenna Relay

Note Antenna Relay is not compatible if ordering X182, Duplexer.

Model Description

X189AA Power Cable, Europe

X162AD Power Cable, UK

X191AD Power Cable, Australia

CA01520AA Power Cable, DC

Model Description

U178AB Cabinet Mount Hardware

X153BA Rack Mount Hardware

Model Description

X347AF Manual Install and User CD

Accessories: Introduction A-3

A.1.1.10 Cables

A.1.1.11 Software Upgrades

A.1.1.11.1 Capacity Plus

A.1.1.11.2 Dynamic Mixed Mode (DMM)

A.1.1.11.3 IP Site Connect

Model Description

X244AJ Auxiliary System Cable

X244AG Community Base Station/Repeater Panel Cable

X244AH Phone Patch Cable

C540AD System Connector Cable

XA00032AA 12 foot Ethernet Cable

DDN9957A 6 feet High speed USB cable (Type A -B)

Model Description

HKLN4439_ MTR3000 Capacity Plus Software Upgrade (NAG)

HKLN4475_ MTR3000 Capacity Plus Software Upgrade (LACR)

HKVN4045_ MTR3000 Capacity Plus Software Upgrade (EMEA)

82012490001 MTR3000 Capacity Plus Software Upgrade (APAC)

HKVN4045_ MTR3000 Capacity Plus Software Upgrade (AU)

Model Description

HKVN4044_ MTR3000 Dynamic Mixed Mode Software Upgrade (NAG)

82012489001 MTR3000 Dynamic Mixed Mode Software Upgrade (APAC)

Model Description

HKLN4476_ MTR3000 IP Site Connect (LACR)

82012491001 MTR3000 IP Site Connect (APAC)

A-4 Accessories: Introduction

A.1.2 MOTOTRBO MTR3000 FRU

A.1.2.1 Power Amplifier, Exciter and Receiver

A.1.2.2 Power Supply

A.1.2.3 Control/Wireline/Backplane/Miscellaneous

A.1.2.4 Manuals

Model Description

DLN6701_ UHF 100W PA (403–470 MHz)

DLN6702_ UHF 100W PA (470–524 MHz)

DLN6703_ UHF Exciter (403–470 MHz)

DLN6704_ UHF Exciter (450–524 MHz)

DLN6705_ UHF Receiver (403–470 MHz)

DLN6706_ UHF Receiver (450–524 MHz)

DLN6714_ 800/900 MHz 100W PA

DLN6715_ 800/900 MHz Exciter

DLN6716_ 800/900 MHz Receiver

Model Description

DLN6707_ AC/DC Power Supply

Model Description

DLN6719_ Station Control TCXO

DLN6718_ Station Control OCXO

DLN6720_ 2 Wire/4 Wire Wireline

DLN6721_ Backplane Interface Board

Model Description

CLN8629 MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Installation and User CD

X347AF Manual Install and User CD

Note The Manual Install and User CD contains:

• MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Installation and User Manual (Including MTR2000 to MTR3000

MOTOTRBO Upgrade Kit)

• MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Basic Service Manual

Accessories: Introduction A-5

A.1.2.5 Microphones/Speakers

A.1.2.6 Miscellaneous Accessories

A.1.2.7 Antenna Relay Kits

A.1.2.8 Preselector Cable Kits

Model Description

GMMN4063 Noise Cancelling Mic

0185180U01 Cable For External Speaker

HSN1006 Speaker

Model Description

RRX4025 ISB50LNC2 Bulkhead Arrestor 125-100

RRX4032 T-1 ISB50 Series Round Member Mount

RRX4021 Lightning/Surge Arrestor

RRX4034 Lightning/Surge Arrestor (110/220V AC Line Surge Protector)

TRN4589 Dual Line Suppressor

3083908X02 Cbl, Field System Adapter

Model Description

CLN1317* Antenna Relay

CLN1316** Antenna Relay For Preselector

Note (*) Includes Antenna Relay and required cables for stations without X265, Preselector

(**) Includes Antenna Relay and required cables for stations that include X265, Preselector

Model Description

CKN1039* Preselector Cable Kit

CKN1040** Preselector Cable For Antenna Relay

Note (*) Order this cable for stations without X371, Antenna Relay

(**) Order this cable for stations with X371, Antenna Relay

A-6 Accessories: Introduction

A.1.2.9 Cabinets/Racks and Hardware

Model Description

THN6700 12 inch Indoor Cabinet

THN6701 30 inch Indoor Cabinet

THN6702 46 inch Indoor Cabinet

THN6752 30 inch Modular Rack (16 RK U)

THN6753 45 inch Modular Rack (24 RK U)

THN6754 52 inch Modular Rack (27 RK U)

THN6788_ Slides Motorola Cabinet

CLN6833_ Slides Non-Motorola Cabinet

CLN6679_ Rack Mount Hardware

Note All cabinets and racks are ordered through aftermarket accessories and are not factory

installed. To order, please call 1-800-422-4210.

Accessories: Introduction A-7

A.1.3 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Upgrade Kit Ordering Guideline

A.1.3.1 Upgrade Assembly

A.1.3.2 Frequency

Model Description

T2003* MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Digital Upgrade

Note (*) The upgrade contains an MTR3000 front bezel, station control module (SCM), Receiver

and Exciter modules with preloaded software.

Model Description

X340MT UHF 100W Power (403–470 MHz)

X450MT 800 MHz 100W Power (806–870 MHz)

X460MT 900 MHz 100W Power (896–940 MHz)

Note Existing peripherals that are being utilized for MTR2000 Base Station/Repeater will retrofit

the MOTOTRBO MTR3000 Base Station/Repeater. There is no need to purchase new

peripherals. If replacement FRU is needed, refer to the list of the FRU in Section A.1.4 on

page A-8.

A-8 Accessories: Introduction

A.1.4 MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Upgrade Kit FRU

A.1.4.1 Exciter and Receiver

A.1.4.2 Power Supply

A.1.4.3 Control/Miscellaneous

A.1.4.4 Manuals

A.1.4.5 Cables

Model Description

DLN6703_ UHF Exciter, (403–470 MHz)

DLN6704_ UHF Exciter (450–524 MHz)

DLN6705_ UHF Receiver (403–470 MHz)

DLN6706_ UHF Receiver (450–524 MHz)

DLN6715_ 800/900 MHz Exciter

DLN6716_ 800/900 MHz Receiver

Model Description

DLN6707_ AC/DC Power Supply

Model Description

DLN6719_ Station Control TCXO

DLN6718_ Station Control OCXO

DLN6721_* Backplane Interface Board

Note (*) Order this backplane interface board to use the MTR3000 Wireline Card on the

MTR2000 MOTOTRBO Upgrade.

Model Description

X347AF Manual Install and User CD

Model Description

XA00032AA 12 foot Ethernet Cable

DDN9957A 6 feet High speed USB cable (Type A -B)

B-1

Appendix B EMEA Warranty, Service and Technical

Support

B.1 Warranty and Service Support

Motorola offers long term support for its products. This support includes full exchange and/or repair

of the product during the warranty period, and service/ repair or spare parts support out of warranty.

Any "return for exchange" or "return for repair" by an authorized Motorola Dealer must be

accompanied by a Warranty Claim Form. Warranty Claim Forms are obtained by contacting an

Authorized Motorola Dealer.

B.1.1 Warranty Period and Return Instructions

The terms and conditions of warranty are defined fully in the Motorola Dealer or Distributor or

Reseller contract. These conditions may change from time to time and the following notes are for

guidance purposes only.

In instances where the product is covered under a "return for replacement" or "return for repair"

warranty, a check of the product should be performed prior to shipping the unit back to Motorola.

This is to ensure that the product has been correctly programmed or has not been subjected to

damage outside the terms of the warranty.

Prior to shipping any radio back to the appropriate Motorola warranty depot, please contact

Customer Resources (Refer to page B-3). All returns must be accompanied by a Warranty Claim

Form, available from your Customer Services representative. Products should be shipped back in

the original packaging, or correctly packaged to ensure no damage occurs in transit.

B.1.2 After Warranty Period

After the Warranty period, Motorola continues to support its products in two ways.

1. Motorola's Managed Technical Services (MTS) offers a repair service to both end users and

dealers at competitive prices.

2. MTS supplies individual parts and modules that can be purchased by dealers who are

technically capable of performing fault analysis and repair.

B-2 EMEA Warranty, Service and Technical Support European Radio Support Centre (ERSC)

B.2 European Radio Support Centre (ERSC)

The ERSC Customer Information Desk is available through the following service numbers:

Austria: 08 00 29 75 41 Italy: 80 08 77 387

Belgium: 08 00 72 471 Luxemburg: 08 00 23 27

Denmark: 80 88 05 72 Netherlands: 08 00 22 45 13

Finland: 08 00 11 49 910 Norway: 80 01 11 15

France: 08 00 90 30 90 Portugal: 08 00 84 95 70

Germany: 08 00 18 75 240 Spain: 90 09 84 902

Greece: 00 80 04 91 29 020 Sweden: 02 07 94 307

UK : 08 00 96 90 95 Switzerland: 08 00 55 30 82

Ireland: 18 00 55 50 21 Iceland: 80 08 147

Or dial the European Repair and Service Centre:

Tel: +49 30 6686 1555

Please use these numbers for repair enquiries only.

B.3 Piece Parts

Some replacement parts, spare parts, and/or product information can be ordered directly.

If a complete Motorola part number is assigned to the part, it is available from Motorola Radio

Products and Solutions Organization (RPSO). If no part number is assigned, the part is not normally

available from Motorola. If the part number is appended with an asterisk, the part is serviceable by

Motorola Depot only. If a parts list is not included, this generally means that no user-serviceable

parts are available for that kit or assembly.

Orders for replacement parts, kits and assemblies should be placed directly on Motorola's local

distribution/dealer organization or via Motorola Online at: http://www.motorola.com/emeaonline

* The Radio Products and Solutions Organization (RPSO) was formerly known as the Radio

Products Services Division (RPSD) and/or the Accessories and Aftermarket Division (AAD).

EMEA Warranty, Service and Technical Support Technical Support B-3

B.4 Technical Support

Motorola Product Services is available to assist the dealer/distributors in resolving any malfunctions

which may be encountered.

North Europe - Stephen Woodrow Central and East Europe - Siggy Punzenberger

Telephone: +44 (0) 1256 488 082 Telephone: +49 (0) 6128 70 2342

Fax: +44 01256 488 080 Fax: +49 (0) 6128 95 1096

Email: CSW066@motorola.com Email: TFG003@email.mot.com

Russia and Belarus - Andrey Nagornykh Germany - Customer Connect Team

Telephone: +7 495 787 8910 Telephone: +49 (0) 30 6686 1539

Fax: +7 495 785 0185 Fax: +49 (0) 30 6686 1916

Email: MWCB47@email.mot.com Email: cgiss.emea@europe.mot.com

Middle East and Africa - Wayne Holmes Italy - Ugo Gentile

Telephone: +49 (0)6126 957 6237 Telephone: +39 0 2822 0325

Fax: +49 (0)6126 957 6826 Fax: +39 0 2822 0334

Email: wayne.holmes@motorola.com Email: C13864@email.mot.com

France - Armand Roy France - Laurent Irrmann

Telephone: +33 1 6935 7868 Telephone: +33 1 6935 7866

Fax: +33 1 6935 7808 Fax: +33 1 6935 7808

Email: armand.roy@motorola.com Email: laurent.irrmann@motorola.com

B.5 Further Assistance From Motorola

You can also contact the Customer Help Desk through the following web address.

http://www.motorola.com/governmentandenterprise/contactus

Notes

B-4 EMEA Warranty, Service and Technical Support Further Assistance From Motorola

C-1

Appendix C LACR Replacement Parts Ordering and

Motorola Service Centers

C.1 Commercial Warranty

Limited Warranty

MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS

I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long

MOTOROLA INC. (“MOTOROLA”) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication

Products listed below (“Product”) against material defects in material and workmanship under normal

use and service for the period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

Motorola will at its option and at no charge either repair the defective Product (with new or

reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of

the defective Product during the warranty period provided it is returned before the expiration of the

warranty period and in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced Product, parts or boards

are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced Product, parts

of boards shall become the property of MOTOROLA.

This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchasing the

Product for commercial, industrial or governmental use only and is not assignable or transferable to

any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA.

MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless

made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement

between MOTOROLA and the original purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation,

maintenance or service of the Product.

MOTOROLA is not responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA

which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any

ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each

system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or

operation of the system in part or as a whole under this warranty.

Base Station/Repeater Two (2) Years

Product Accessories One (1) Year

C-2 LACR Replacement Parts Ordering and Motorola Service Centers Limited Warranty

II. General Provisions

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product.

Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA'S option, is the exclusive

remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS THE COMPLETE WARRANTY FOR THE PRODUCT AND IS GIVEN

IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES. MOTOROLA DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO

EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE

OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY COMMERCIAL LOSS; INCONVIENCE; LOSS OF USE, TIME,

DATA, GOOD WILL, REVENUES, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; OR OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,

INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN ANY WAY RELATED TO OR ARISING FROM

THE SALE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT.

III. How To Get Warranty Service

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number)

in order to receive warranty service and deliver or send the Product item, transportation and

insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location before the expiration of the warranty

period. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola through one of its authorized warranty service

locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining

warranty service. You can also open a Contact Us case on Motorola Online

(http://www.motorola.com/businessonline).

IV. What This Warranty Does Not Cover

This warranty does not cover:

A. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal customary or

authorized manner.

B. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, liquid, lightning, neglect or act of God.

C. Defects or damage from testing, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or

adjustment not provided or authorized in writing by MOTOROLA.

D. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or

workmanship.

E. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs

(including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola supplied equipment)

which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola's normal

warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim.

F. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible.

G. Freight costs to ship the product to the repair depot.

H. Batteries (because they carry their own separate limited warranty) or consumables.

I. Customer’s failure to comply with all applicable industry and OSHA standards.

J. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the

Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA’s published specifications or the

FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially

distributed from MOTOROLA.

K. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of

the Product.

L. Normal and customary wear and tear.

LACR Replacement Parts Ordering and Motorola Service Centers Replacement Parts Ordering C-3

V. Governing Law

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA.

C.2 Replacement Parts Ordering

C.2.1 Basic Ordering Information

When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, the complete identification number

should be included. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number

is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part, and

sufficient description of the desired component to identify it.

C.2.2 Motorola Online

Motorola Online users can access our online catalog at http://www.motorola.com/businessonline

To register for online access:

• Have your Motorola Customer number available.

• Please go to http://www.motorola.com/businessonline and click on “Sign Up Now.”

• Complete form and submit it.

• Contact your BDM to complete set-up and it will be done within 24 to 48 hours.

C.3 Motorola Service Centers

C.3.1 Servicing Information

If a unit requires further complete testing, knowledge and/or details of component level

troubleshooting or service than is customarily performed at the basic level, please send the radio to

a Motorola Service Center as listed below.

C.3.2 Motorola de México, S.A.

Bosques de Alisos 125

Col. Bosques de las Lomas CP 05120

México D.F.

México

Tel: (5) 257-6700

C.3.3 Motorola de Colombia, Ltd.

Carrera 7 No. 71-52

Bogota - Colombia

Tel: (571) 376-6990

C-4 LACR Replacement Parts Ordering and Motorola Service Centers Motorola Service Centers

Notes

D-1

Appendix D NAG Replacement Parts Ordering and

Motorola Service Centers

D.1 Commercial Warranty